Fedegari Autoclaaf Technical Manual

SERIES
FVG
STERILIZERS
TECHNICAL MANUAL
FEDEGARI AUTOKLAVEN AG
Via alla Gerra, 11 CH-6930 Bedano SWITZERLAND
0041 91 9352090 0041 91 9352099 http://www.fedegariautoklaven.ch
SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 2
SECTION 3 - DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS 3
SECTION 4 - PROCESS CONTROLLER 4
SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE 5
SECTION 6 - COMPONENT DATA SHEETS 6
FEDEGARI AUTOKLAVEN AG
Via alla Gerra, 11 CH-6930 Bedano SWITZERLAND
0041 91 9352090 0041 91 9352099 http://www.fedegariautoklaven.ch
FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL
SECTION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SECTION 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 1 / 22 February 2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SECTION 1
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE...........................................................4

1.1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.2. FAMILY IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3. MACHINE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.4. KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE ........................................................................................... 5

1.4.1. STERILIZATION CHAMBER ....................................................................................................... 5
1.4.2. LID AND SEALING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 6
1.4.3. TECHNICAL AREA CABINET ..................................................................................................... 6
1.4.4. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................... 7
1.4.5. ELECTRICAL PANEL .................................................................................................................. 7
1.4.6. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ................................................................................. 7
1.4.7. PROCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL..................................... 7
1.4.8. ELECTRIC COMPRESSOR FOR PRESSURIZING THE GASKET ........................................... 7
1.4.9. STEAM GENERATOR................................................................................................................. 7
1.4.10. CONDENSATE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM ............................................................................ 8
1.4.11. PRODUCT LOADING/UNLOADING DEVICES........................................................................... 8
1.5. MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL) ............................................ 8

1.5.1. ENHANCED INTERNAL ELECTRIC AIR COMPRESSOR (KG41) ............................................ 9
1.5.2. CONDENSATE COOLING UNIT (KG50) .................................................................................... 9
1.5.3. CONDENSATE RECOVERY TRAY (KG64) ............................................................................... 9
1.5.4. PRE-VACUUM DEVICE (KG65)................................................................................................ 10
1.5.5. TANK FOR SUPPLYING WATER TO THE STEAM GENERATOR (KG66)............................. 10
1.5.6. PROCESS PRINTER (KG81) .................................................................................................... 10
1.5.7. LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83) ............................................................................................... 11
1.5.8. PORT ADAPTER FOR VALIDATION SENSOR (KG90)........................................................... 12
1.6. CONTROL AND MONITORING COMPONENTS.............................................................................. 12

1.6.1. CONTROL AND MONITORING STATIONS ............................................................................. 12
1.6.1.1. OPERATOR PANEL.............................................................................................................. 13
1.6.1.2. DISPLAY................................................................................................................................ 13
1.6.1.3. KEYPAD ................................................................................................................................ 13
1.6.1.4. MAIN SWITCH....................................................................................................................... 16
1.6.1.5. MONITORING VACUUM GAUGES ...................................................................................... 16
1.6.1.6. MANUAL VALVE FOR CHAMBER DISCHARGE................................................................. 16

1.7. SAFETY SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 17

1.7.1. DESCRIPTION OF THE CHAMBER OPENING AND CLOSING SYSTEM ............................. 17
1.7.2. SAFETY VALVES ...................................................................................................................... 18
1.8. TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................................................ 19

1.8.1. MAIN DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS........................................................................................ 19
1.8.2. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS..................................................................................................... 20
1.8.3. WATER CONSUMPTION .......................................................................................................... 21
1.8.4. EMC SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................ 21

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE
1.1. INTRODUCTION
The new FVG range is composed of compact, top-loading, assembly-line-built vertical saturated steam
sterilizers. The innovative and sensible design, the new intuitively usable process controller, the high-quality
finish and materials give this machine a higher functional performance than any other sterilizer in the same
category. FVG models are suitable for treating solids and liquids (if the liquids are in open or unsealed
containers) and are the latest generation of small automatic sterilizers for microbiology laboratories, research
institutions, universities and food industries.
1.2. FAMILY IDENTIFICATION
The FVG sterilizer family consists of the following models, which differ in terms of useful loading capacity:
FVG1 50 liters
FVG2 75 liters
FVG3 140 liters
1.3. MACHINE IDENTIFICATION
Vertical steam sterilizers of the FVG family are identified by means of an appropriately provided identification
plate, which is fixed to the body of the autoclave and bears all the key information of the machine.
The markings on the plate are indelible, as prescribed by applicable product standards.
Figure 1.3 shows a facsimile of the CE identification plate of the machine.
1. Model
2. Serial number
3. Year of manufacture
4. Code of notified body for
97/23/EC directive
Figure 1.3 CE identification plate

1.4. KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE
The sterilizer (see Figure 1.4) is composed of the following main components:
- Sterilization chamber;
- Lid and sealing system;
- Technical area cabinet;
- Electrical system;
- Electrical panel;
- Hydraulic and pneumatic system;
- Process controller with integrated operator panel;
- Electric compressor for gasket pressurization;
- Steam generator;
- Condensate heat recovery system;
- Devices for loading/unloading the product.
! WARNING!
During the operation of the sterilizer,
the temperature of the lids internal
parts can reach high values. During the
loading/unloading operations, use the
suitable protection means.
Figure 1.4 - Sterilizer
1.4.1. STERILIZATION CHAMBER
The sterilization chamber is a pressure vessel that has a cylindrical cross-section and a vertical axis. The
material to be processed is placed in this chamber. The bottom slopes toward the discharge, which is meant
to collect condensation so as to drain it. The chamber is made of AISI 316Ti steel with mirror-finish internal
polishing and a surface roughness Ra < 0.19 m.

1.4.2. LID AND SEALING SYSTEM
Lid
The lid rotates horizontally and is coupled to the chamber by means of a C-shaped band. This band, under
the effect of even the slightest pressure inside the chamber, prevents rotation and therefore prevents
opening. The lid of the chamber is provided with a handle (Fig. 1.4.2 a) that facilitates its opening and
closing, both of which are performed horizontally. During the closure maneuver, a safety lever mechanism
(Fig 1.4.2 b) installed on the lid forces the operator to use both hands (Fig 1.4.2 c), avoiding any crushing of
fingers.
Figure 1.4.2.b Safety lever mechanism of lid

Figure 1.4.2.a Handle of lid closure system
closure system
Figure 1.4.2.c Lid closure system: use of both Figure 1.4.2.d Lid sealing system: sealing
hands required gasket
Sealing system
The sealing system is constituted by a silicone rubber gasket. Tightness of the sterilization chamber when
the lid is closed is achieved by introducing compressed air in the gasket seat. In this way, the gasket is
pushed outward and compressed against the lid.
1.4.3. TECHNICAL AREA CABINET
The external cabinet, made of AISI 304 stainless steel and polyurethane resin panels, is meant to enclose
the hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical systems.

1.4.4. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The electrical system of the sterilizer is built in accordance with European standards EN61010-1 and
EN61010-2-041.
The system includes the electrical panel, all the control lines of the electrohydraulic and electropneumatic
actuators of the motors, of the electronic process controller and of the steam generator. This system also
connects the process controller to all the sensors and transducers (e.g. pressure switches, heat probes, et
cetera) and to the devices for interfacing with the operator. Finally, it provides the primary power supply line
and the corresponding protection system.
1.4.5. ELECTRICAL PANEL
The electrical panel is located in the front part of the machine containment cabinet. This panel contains the
main electrical and electronic devices for power supply, disconnection and distribution, including the main
power switch. This switch, in particular, also acts as an emergency stop.
1.4.6. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
The hydraulic and pneumatic system is constituted by piping and electric valves.
NOTE
The details of the hydraulic and pneumatic system are described in the P&ID Diagram
contained in Section 3 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.
NOTE
The details of the components related to the hydraulic and pneumatic system are described in
the component data sheets contained in Section 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.
1.4.7. PROCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL
The electronic process controller is constituted by a programmable logic controller (PLC), which together with
specific hardware blocks and other electronic equipment provides total control of the machine and the
activities related to interactive communication with the operator.
The Operator Panel integrated in the electronic process controller is constituted by an LCD display with 4
rows and 20 columns and by a membrane keyboard, by means of which the operator manages the
interactive communication with the machine.
NOTE
The details of the electronic process controller with integrated operator panel are described in
the corresponding data sheet contained in Section 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.
1.4.8. ELECTRIC COMPRESSOR FOR PRESSURIZING THE GASKET
The electric compressor integrated in the machine generates the compressed air required to supply the lid
gasket: an AISI 316 plenum chamber with a capacity of 2.7 liters is sufficient to ensure its correct operation.
1.4.9. STEAM GENERATOR
The steam generator is constituted by a horizontal pressure vessel made of AISI 316 stainless steel, which is
supplied with water. The water is converted into steam by means of an electric resistor inserted in the front
part of the vessel. Water is loaded into the generator by means of an electric pump, which can be supplied
from an external tank (if the KG 66 option is provided) or by direct connection to the mains. Use, in the steam

generator, water of low hardness in order to minimize scale forming (conductivity < 15 S/cm at 25C -
TOC< 500 ppb pH: 6.0 7.5). A check valve prevents the outflow of water from the pressure vessel toward
the pump. A pressure switch senses the pressure inside the body of the generator, controls the electrical
power supply of the resistors, and reports to the process controller when the pressure needed to allow
feeding of the chamber is reached. An appropriately provided sensor detects the level of water reached
inside the pressure vessel. In addition to the above, the steam generator is provided with the following
devices correlated to the operating safety of the pressure vessel:
- Manual discharge valve;

- Safety valve;
- Pressure gauge for sensing the pressure of the vessel, in a position that is clearly visible to the operator;
- Thermostat controlling the maximum temperature of the generator;
- Minimum-level sensor, which issues a signal in case of operation without water and switches off the
resistor.
1.4.10. CONDENSATE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
In order to reduce electrical consumption, on the discharge of the chamber there is a coil-type heat
exchanger, which allows to reduce the temperature of the effluents to less than 100C and to preheat the
water that supplies the steam generator, ensuring an energy saving of approximately 15% of the total. It is
also possible to preheat the air introduced in the chamber (if the KG41 option is provided) in order to improve
product drying.
1.4.11. PRODUCT LOADING/UNLOADING DEVICES
The loading/unloading system of the machine is based on the use of wire mesh or steel plate baskets
provided with a folding handle (see Figure 1.4.11.b).
Figure 1.4.11.a- Loading/unloading operation Figure 1.4.11.b- Loading/unloading devices
1.5. MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL)
The sterilizer in its basic configuration can be fitted with a series of optional components (kits), which are
listed below and are identified by means of a reference number.

NOTE
For further information on the additional component kits, please refer to the documents cited in
the note field of each component.
Kit identifier Kit name

KG41 Enhanced internal electric air compressor
KG50 Condensate cooling unit
KG64 Condensate recovery tray with sterilizing filter (not available on FVG3)
KG65 Pre-vacuum device
KG66 Tank for supplying water to the steam generator
KG81 Process printer
KG83 Process printer
KG90 Port adapter for validation sensor
1.5.1. ENHANCED INTERNAL ELECTRIC AIR COMPRESSOR (KG41)
This is a higher-capacity air compressor, installed inside the cabinet of the sterilizer in order to obtain an air
ballasting effect. This option also installs a sterilizing filter, in order to treat the air to be introduced in the
chamber after sterilization. The polypropylene container of the filter can be disassembled and sterilized in the
autoclave, and the filter has an absolute retention of 0.22 m for liquids and 0.003 m for gases, which
ensures a reduction of the bacterial load of Brevindimonas (Pseudomonas) of 107/cm2. Air ballasting consists
in the controlled replacement of the steam that is present in the chamber at the end of sterilization with air
during the load cooling/drying phase. This cooling method allows to prevent the unwanted overboiling of the
fluids contained in unsealed containers. This option is also advisable if one requires effective drying of the
load (glassware and non-porous solids). This oil-free piston compressor is extremely quiet and efficient.
NOTE
The details of the components that constitute the KG41 kit are described in the associated data
sheets contained in Section 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.
1.5.2. CONDENSATE COOLING UNIT (KG50)
In output from the coil-type exchanger, the temperature of the effluents is approximately 100C. In order to
cool these effluents further, it is possible to provide a compact air condensing unit, which ensures a final
temperature of 60C. This option must be provided if the condensate recovery tray (KG64) is provided:
ensuring effluent temperature reduction ensures that the operator works in safety.
NOTE
The details of the components of the KG50 kit are described in the corresponding data sheets
1.5.3. CONDENSATE RECOVERY TRAY (KG64)
This option (available only for FVG1 and FVG2 models) allows to avoid the need to connect the machine to
an external drainage point in order to discharge the condensate, because the condensate is transferred into
a specifically provided container installed inside the technical area of the machine. The operator has to
empty this container manually at the end of the cycle. The condensate recovery tray is provided with a
sterilizing filter that can be disassembled and sterilized in an autoclave and ensures the treatment of
gaseous effluents. The filter has an absolute retention of 0.22 m for liquids and 0.003 m for gases,
ensuring a reduction of the bacterial load of Brevindimonas (Pseudomonas) equal to 107/cm2. If this option is

provided, it is necessary to equip the machine with the condensate cooling unit (KG50): ensuring effluent
temperature reduction ensures that the operator works in safety.
NOTE
1.5.4. PRE-VACUUM DEVICE (KG65)
If it is necessary to treat solids having a geometry that does not allow easy air evacuation, it is essential to
perform a pre-treatment that ensures effective air removal. For this purpose, it is possible to provide the
machine with a membrane pump, which allows to reach a final vacuum of 300 mbar abs. In any case, this
device is not intended to perform final load drying with time-controlled vacuum hold.
NOTE
1.5.5. TANK FOR SUPPLYING WATER TO THE STEAM GENERATOR (KG66)
This is an external container with a capacity of 15 liters, made of high-density polyethylene, suitable to
contain the demineralized water needed to allow correct operation of the autoclave without providing a direct
connection to the water mains. Its capacity ensures the execution of at least one complete sterilization cycle.
The tank is equipped with a minimum-level sensor for protecting the feed pump of the steam generator. This
sensor is of the variable-depth type and is fixed to the lid of the tank in order to allow its quick disassembly.
! WARNING!
The tank must contain at least 10 liters of

water in order to ensure complete
execution of the sterilization cycle
NOTE
1.5.6. PROCESS PRINTER (KG81)
This is an alphanumeric printer, which is installed close to the operator panel and is intended to generate
detailed process documentation. The printer has a 200-dpi thermal printing system, uses 57.7 mm-wide
paper, and is connected to the controller by means of an RS232 serial output.
The printer is connected directly to the process controller and has the primary function of documenting in real
time the execution of the sterilization program in progress.
The printer is also used to obtain the reports, parameters and data related to the finished sterilization cycle.
The operator has to load fresh paper and remove the printed report at the end of the sterilization process.

DEVICE FUNCTION
Green Power
When lit, indicates that the printer is powered.
LED
When lit continuously, indicates an error

(insufficient or excessive head power supply or
Red Status LED
excessive head temperature); when flashing,
indicates that there is no more paper left.
Print button Not enabled.
Feed button When pressed, causes the paper to advance.
Fig. 1.5.5 Thermal printer
NOTE
1.5.7. LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83)
This is a semiautomatic device that facilitates loading and unloading of the baskets for containing materials.
The kit is composed of an electric winch, which has a motorized vertical motion and a horizontal arm that can
be orientated manually and is complete with a mechanical accessory for fastening the material loading
baskets.
The motor is controlled by means of a manual keypad with two interlocked buttons and allows the vertical
movement of the arm.
! WARNING!
Improper use of the load lifting device

can cause danger for the operator.
Absolutely do not use the lifting device to
handle loads other than those
specifically prepared by FEDEGARI
Fig. 1.5.6.a Lifting device

! WARNING!
To ensure safe and balanced lifting of the
material containing baskets, it is
recommended to use the FEDEGARI
basket fastening accessory
Fig. 1.5.6.b Fastening accessory
NOTE
The KG83 kit is available for all models but is recommended for the FVG3 model.
1.5.8. PORT ADAPTER FOR VALIDATION SENSOR (KG90)
On the chamber of every sterilizer of the FVG series there is a port to allow the insertion of validation heat
probes in the chamber. The port is located in an easily accessible region on the side of the chamber. When it
is not being used, it is kept closed by a stainless steel plug fixed by means of a clamp. A special kit for
inserting up to 12 validation probes, developed by Fedegari, is available as an option.
NOTE
1.6. CONTROL AND MONITORING COMPONENTS
The sterilizer is controlled by means of a system constituted by a PLC. The PLC supervises the main
actuation systems and supervises and monitors the hardware that constitutes the machine, organizing the
activation of the operating sequences (phases) of the specific programmed sterilization cycle.
Moreover, the PLC, also termed process controller hereinafter, manages communication with the operator
by means of appropriately provided peripheral units.
The machine is also provided with control/monitoring elements that complement, independently of the PLC,
the tasks of the PLC as regards certain control/monitoring functions.
1.6.1. CONTROL AND MONITORING STATIONS
The sterilizer is provided with functional assembles and elements for control/monitoring, which are arranged
on the forward and front panel of the containment cabinet.
The control and monitoring elements of the machine are:
- Operator panel (integrated in the electronic process controller);

- Main switch;
- Vacuum gauges for chamber and generator monitoring;

- Manual discharge valve.
The operator, by standing in the area in front of the panel that accommodates the control/monitoring
elements, is able to work easily and to access immediately any indications or messages.
Figure 1.6.1.a Location of the front Figure 1.6.1.b Location of the front
control/monitoring elements control/monitoring elements
1.6.1.1. OPERATOR PANEL
The Exor T-Line model TMD02R-04-B850 process controller was developed specifically to ensure the
automatic operation of Fedegaris vertical saturated steam sterilizers. The system is based on a model
SCM03 PLC by SITEK, which is integrated in the panel and connected to it by means of a serial port. The
panel is extremely easy to use even for personnel lacking computer skills, and it allows to start and monitor
the sterilization cycle in memory. All information related to the cycle is also printed by a small thermal printer
arranged to the side of the process controller.
Figure 3.6.1.1 Operator panel
1.6.1.2. DISPLAY
The operator panel comprises a display, which is the operators primary visual display unit. The display is of
the monochrome liquid-crystal (LCD) type and consists of 4 rows of 20 characters. The display shows the
various menus, which can be selected hierarchically by the operator according to the choices made and the
main commands given to the machine. In particular, the display shows the values of the parameters related
to the sterilization cycle in progress and the alarm indications.
1.6.1.3. KEYPAD
The operator panel comprises a keypad, which is the primary apparatus available to the operator for
communicating with the machine and for giving it operating commands. The keypad is of the membrane
type, with 19 keys and 1 LED indicator, which have the following functions:

KEY FUNCTION
START key
This key allows to start the cycle chosen during preparation.

This is the numeral 1 of the numeric keypad in the edit field.
STOP key
End of preparation, end of emergency, end of cycle.

PHASE STEP key
This key allows to pass from one phase to the next, when permitted by the software.
CYCLE STOP key
This key allows to activate the emergency phase.

DISPLAY key
This key allows to display the active alarms.

DOOR UNLOCK key
This key allows to deflate the sealing gasket.

DOOR LOCK key
This key allows to inflate the sealing gasket.

PRINT SCREEN key
This key allows to produce a printout of the screen.

Available
Available

KEY FUNCTION
CLEAR key
Allows to exit from the software page, consequently returning to the previous menu.
Allows to leave the EDIT field without saving the changed data.
INS key
This key allows to activate the cursor in the edit field.
ENTER key
This key allows to mute the buzzer.
It also allows to transfer parameter changes to the PLC.
It allows to confirm (save) the edited value in the EDIT field.
If this key is kept pressed for more than 2 seconds, it allows direct enabling of the
panel command menu.
. Key
This key allows to enter the decimal point in the EDIT field.
L (LEFT) key
This key allows scrolling to the left in the EDIT fields.
R (RIGHT) key
This key allows scrolling to the right in the EDIT fields.
U (UP) key
This key allows upward scrolling of the software pages.
D (DOWN) key
This key allows downward scrolling of the software pages.
FLT LED
This LED, when lit, indicates the occurrence of an abnormal condition.

1.6.1.4. MAIN SWITCH
Operating the main switch (position I) located on the front panel of the sterilizer allows to activate the
process controller. Subordinately, the peripheral units connected to the controller are activated; these
peripherals form, together with the controller, the main hardware of the machine. By returning the switch to
the O position, the process controller and the peripherals connected to it are deactivated.
NOTE
The main switch also acts as
emergency stop.
Figure 1.6.1.2 Main switch
1.6.1.5. MONITORING VACUUM GAUGES
The vacuum gauges installed on the machine are analog mechanical pressure indicators, suitable for
displaying the pressure in the pressure vessels that are part of the sterilizer.
One vacuum gauge (with an 0-5 bar abs scale) is dedicated to sensing the pressure in the sterilization
chamber.
The other vacuum gauge (with an 0-6 bar abs scale) indicates the pressure of the steam generator. The
indicators are provided with a pressure readout scale (bar). They are capable of indicating the presence of
pressure or vacuum even when the sterilizer is deactivated and the chamber is not operating. Both vacuum
gauges are provided with a red notch at the maximum permissible pressure, as prescribed by standards.
Figure 1.6.1.3 Monitoring vacuum gauges
1.6.1.6. MANUAL VALVE FOR CHAMBER DISCHARGE
This is a membrane valve, located on the front panel of the machine and connected to the chamber of the
sterilizer. Its function is to allow the operator, if automatic operation is not possible, to manually check that
there really is no pressure in the chamber at the end of the sterilization process. This valve is also used to
discharge any pressure that has formed inside the chamber when one wishes to reopen the lid for another
load.

! WARNING!
Opening the manual valve can cause hot steam to exit from the discharge duct located on the
rear side of the machine.
Beware of the risk of scalding.
NOTE
Turning the knob clockwise until it
stops closes the duct for the free
discharge of the sterilization
chamber. If the knob is turned
counterclockwise, the chamber can
be discharged as soon as the knob
moves from the closed stop position.
The maximum cross-section
available for discharge is provided
by turning the knob
counterclockwise to the stop
position.
Figure 1.6.1.4 Manual valve for chamber discharge
1.7. SAFETY SYSTEMS
1.7.1. DESCRIPTION OF THE CHAMBER OPENING AND CLOSING SYSTEM
Initial conditions of the system

Before closing the chamber, and until the lid has reached the position provided for this purpose, the limit
switch for the closed position of the lid is open and accordingly interrupts the circuit that allows to feed
compressed air into the gasket seat. Accordingly, it is impossible as explained below to introduce
pressurized fluids in the chamber.
Starting the closure maneuver

The lid of the autoclave is turned manually from the open position to the closed position by using both hands,
thus avoiding any crushing of fingers. When the lid reaches the position intended for closure, the limit switch
changes state and enables the system to send the command, allowing to introduce compressed air in the
gasket seat.
Closing the chamber

Once the clearance of the limit switch has been obtained, ensuring the correct position of the lid, the
pressure of the operator on the door locking button causes compressed air to be introduced in the gasket
seat, starting the complete closure of the chamber and locking the lid.
Operation of the sealing system

Propelled by the compressed air, the gasket moves upward, compressing itself against the perimeter of the
lid, which is accordingly raised from the inactive position and is retained by the two semicircular brackets.
The compression of the gasket against the lid ensures the complete closure of the autoclave and its
tightness against the action of any pressurized fluids introduced in the chamber.

Clearance to introduce fluid in the chamber

The pressure of the air in the gasket seat is detected by a pressure switch. When this pressure reaches the
preset value, the pressure switch reports to the process controller that the chamber is closed and in fully
sealed conditions, enabling the start of the process cycle and the introduction of fluids in the chamber.
Clearance of the process controller to introduce fluids in the chamber is controlled in fail-safe mode by a
safety circuit, which checks that:
- the pressure switch reports that the lid gasket has inflated;
- the lid is in the correct position, by means of the clearance of the limit switch.
Conditions required to start the opening maneuver

Starting the opening of the autoclave requires that all the preliminary conditions specified hereinafter have
been checked by the process controller:
- the process cycle must have ended;

- the pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical safety
device must both report that the pressure inside the chamber has returned to the atmospheric pressure;
- and, if the (safety temperature) function is set, the heat probe located in the chamber must detect a
temperature that is not higher than the set value, ensuring that any liquids placed to sterilize in glass
containers inside the autoclave have reached a temperature below their boiling temperature at
atmospheric pressure;
- Once the process controller has enabled lid opening, the release of the air introduced in the gasket seat
depends on checking that the residual pressure in the chamber is lower than 50 mbar by means of a
pressure switch. This check is performed in fail-safe mode.
Release of the air introduced in the gasket seat

Once the clearances described above have been obtained, the operators pressure on the door release
button cause the discharge of the compressed air from the gasket seat.
Manual opening of the autoclave

After the automatic discharge of the air from the sealing gasket seat, the opening maneuver is completed
manually.
Figure 1.7.1 Chamber opening and closing
1.7.2. SAFETY VALVES
To ensure total operator safety, the sterilizer is equipped with the following devices:

A safety valve meant to discharge the excess pressure that is present inside the chamber;
A safety valve that discharges the excess pressure in the independent steam generator.
Figure 1.7.2.a Chamber safety valve Figure 1.7.2.b Generator safety valve
! WARNING!
These valves are set mechanically to the maximum allowed value. Tampering with these safety
valves may cause severe damage to the machine and severe injury to the operator.
The person in charge of the machine is required to periodically check the efficiency and correct
action of the safety valves. FEDEGARI declines all responsibility arising from tampering or
neglect of the overpressure safety systems.
! WARNING!
The machine is equipped with safety valves that have been calibrated and checked by the
builder at an ambient pressure of 1 abs. bar.
If the machine is installed in a location with an ambient pressure that is substantially different
from 1 bar, FEDEGARI recommends to explain this to the qualified personnel and/or the
technicians selected to install the machine.
! WARNING!
The safety valves have to be replaced or revised and re-calibrated every two years after the
starting apart from the using frequency or the working conditions as long as more restrictive
rules will not occur in the country of use.
NOTE
For further information regarding the safety valves of the chamber and of the steam generator,
please refer to the data sheets contained in Section 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.
1.8. TECHNICAL DATA
1.8.1. MAIN DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
The main dimensions of the vertical steam sterilizer, related to the FVG family, are given in the following
tables:
Unit of Autoclave model

Dimensions and weights
measure FVG1 FVG2 FVG3
Autoclave height mm 990 990 1120
Autoclave width (1) mm 650 650 725
Autoclave depth (1) mm 650 650 740
Autoclave width (2) mm 1095 1095 1300
Autoclave depth (2) mm 730 730 820
Max weight of empty autoclave kg 140 150 175
Max weight of full autoclave kg 240 270 340
Chamber height mm 400 600 700
Chamber diameter mm 405 405 505
Useful loading capacity of chamber liters 50 75 140
Loading height mm 900 900 1010
Heat dissipation Kcal/h 200 300 450
(1) external dimensions when lid is closed
(2) external dimensions when lid is open
1.8.2. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Functional parameters
Sterilization process using saturated steam

Process control automatic, with PLC
Sound pressure level < 64 dBA (Ref. EN ISO 3746)
Operating pressure 2.5 bar g
Maximum sterilization temperature 135C
Design pressure -1/4 bar g
Design temperature 152C
Electrical parameters

Three-phase version with neutral
Supply voltage V 400 400 400
Frequency Hz 50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1)
Power absorption Kw 4.5 (2) 6.5 (2) 7.5 (2)
(1) available on request also in a 60-Hz version

(2) add 0.5 kW if option KG83 is present


Single-phase version with neutral
measure FVG1 FVG2
Supply voltage V 230 230
(1)
Frequency Hz 50 50 (1)
Power absorption kW 3.5 (2) 3.5 (2)
(1) also available on request in a 60-Hz version

(2) for the single-phase version, options KG83 and KG65 are not available and the power of the resistor of the
generator is reduced to 3 kW
NOTE
In accordance with the requirements of product standard EN 61010-1 par. 5.1.3. item (C), the
power absorption indicated on the CE data plate refers to the model of the sterilizer in its most
complete configuration, including all the possible options provided.
Construction parameters
Operator interface keyboard and monochrome screen with 4 lines x 20 characters
Pressure sensing piezoelectric transducer
Temperature sensing Pt100 heat probe
Chamber closure lid with horizontal manual rotation, with pneumatic sealing
gasket
Chamber material AISI 316Ti stainless steel
Degree of protection of operator panel IP54 (front)
1.8.3. WATER CONSUMPTION
Unit of Autoclave Model

Consumption
Deionized water for generator

liters 5 8 9
(consumption per cycle)
This consumption refers to the maximum values in fully loaded conditions.

The water to be used in the steam generator must have a low hardness, in order to minimize the forming of
scale.
Recommended characteristics: Conductivity < 15 S/cm at 25C - TOC< 500 ppb Ph: 6.0 7.5
1.8.4. EMC SPECIFICATIONS
FEDEGARI autoclaves of the FVG family have been subjected to a series of tests to determine their
compliance with the minimum requirements of Directive 89/336/EC related to electromagnetic compatibility.
The tests that have been conducted are listed below:
Noise emitted at power supply terminals compliant with EN 55011 standard, class B group 1/2
Immunity to rapid pulse bursts compliant with EN 61000-4-4 standard, Level 3 Criterion A

Immunity to electrostatic discharges (ESD) compliant with EN 61000-4-2 standard, Level 3 Criterion A

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 1 / 11 July 2005

1. INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................3

1.1. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ACCEPTABLE FOR USE............................................................ 3
1.2. REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 3
1.3. STERILIZER PLACEMENT ................................................................................................................. 3
1.4. CONNECTION TO POWER SOURCES AND TO UTILITiES ............................................................. 5

1.4.1. HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS..................................................................................................... 5
1.4.2. CONNECTIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY....................................................... 5
1.4.2.1. 400 Vac THREE-PHASE VERSION........................................................................................ 6
1.4.2.2. 230 Vac SINGLE-PHASE VERSION ...................................................................................... 7
1.5. INSTALLING THE LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (kG83)........................................................................... 7

1.5.1. MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................................... 8
1.5.1.1. MOUNTING ON PREPARED STERILIZER............................................................................ 8
1.5.1.2. MOUNTING ON NON-PREPARED STERILIZER................................................................... 9
1.5.2. ELECTRICAL WIRING .............................................................................................................. 10
1.6. CHECKING THE INSTALLATION..................................................................................................... 11
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 2 / 11 July 2005

1. INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ACCEPTABLE FOR USE
The installation environment must be ventilated and adequately lit. Suitable environmental conditions for
correct operation of the sterilizer and of its management system are as follows:
Environmental parameters
Equipment for use indoors
Maximum altitude 2000 meters
Ambient temperature for operation minimum 10C - maximum 40C
Relative humidity for operation maximum 85% noncondensing, with T 40C
Ambient temperature for storage minimum 5C - maximum 50C
Relative humidity for storage maximum 80% with T 40C
Maximum mains voltage variation +/-10% of nominal voltage +/-2% frequency
Installation category II
Pollution degree 2
! WARNING!
If artificial lighting is provided in the installation area, ensure that the light sources comply with
the requirements of the statutory provisions applicable in the country of use regarding
operator health and safety. The sterilizer is equipped with an LCD display. Do not align and
arrange the display so as to produce reflections and glare on the viewing planes of the
operator.
1.2. REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE MATERIALS
The sterilizer is shipped in suitable containers (packing) and is wrapped in materials that are meant to
protect it against external agents during shipping and during storage periods. The packing material must be
removed with utmost care in order to avoid, during these operations, improper interaction with the structures
and surfaces of the sterilizer. The outer cabinet of the sterilizer is painted and therefore requires adequate
care to keep it free from scratches and scuffing.
NOTE
Do not discard the original packing container, in order to ensure correct transport of the
sterilizer if it has to be moved.
1.3. STERILIZER PLACEMENT
Correct placement of the sterilizer ensures the perfect functionality of the system and easy use on the part of
the operator.
For placement, consider that the space available around the sterilizer must be provided so as to ensure that
the operator and the maintenance technicians can perform the following activities:
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 3 / 11 July 2005

the movements required to operate comfortably the control and monitoring devices;
all the movements needed for loading/unloading operations, including the use of any accessories;
ordinary maintenance, particularly for cleaning and purging;
extraordinary maintenance.
After placing the sterilizer, check that it is perfectly level.

The sterilizer must be arranged on a flat surface and proximate to an extractor hood.
In placing the sterilizer, follow strictly the information given in detail in the installation drawings and
documents provided by FEDEGARI.
NOTE
For further details, please refer to Section 3 of the Technical Manual.
! WARNING!
In perform sterilizer installation, follow the instructions given in the installation drawing
supplied by FEDEGARI, in addition to the indications given explicitly in this manual.
In particular, the following issues must be given special attention:
the floor of the installation room must comply with the required load-bearing
capacities, which in particular must include the additional loads that bear on the
structure as a consequence of the hydraulic tests to be performed on the sterilizer;
all the precautions required by statutory provisions and allowed by technology must
be taken in seismic areas;
the piping and accessories for feeding and discharging the various service fluids to
and from the sterilizer, as well as the lines and accessories for electrical
connections to the control panel and to other components of the sterilizer, must
comply with the prescriptions of the applicable statutory provisions.
NOTE
Any hydraulic testing that needs to be performed after the sterilizer has been installed at the
Users premises in accordance with the statutory provisions applicable in the country of use
may entail an increased load that can cause precarious stability of the structures meant to
support the sterilizer. Weight and size data are available in the installation diagram.
! WARNING!
During installation, absolutely AVOID the forming of structural links to surfaces or bodies that
are subjected to stresses or dynamic loads that originate externally with respect to the
sterilizer.
If a correlation to structures subjected to such loads is provided in the area where the sterilizer
is meant to be installed, you should describe the associated problems to FEDEGARI before
making the purchase.
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 4 / 11 July 2005

1.4. CONNECTION TO POWER SOURCES AND TO UTILITIES
Connection to power sources must comply fully with the specifications given in this chapter. If you do not
have the appropriate means or accessories to allow connection according to best manufacturing practice,
you should contact FEDEGARIs technical service.
1.4.1. HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS
Hydraulic connections to utilities are provided by means of flexible hoses.

The connections provided on the rear panel of the sterilizer are:
a 6-mm compression nipple for the discharge;

a 6-mm compression nipple for connection to the mains for supplying water to the generator.
If it is not possible to connect the discharge of the sterilizer to the mains, the optional kit KG64 (available only
for FVG1 and FVG2 models) allows to eliminate the need to connect the sterilizer to an external drainage
point in order to discharge the condensate, since the condensate is transferred into a specifically provided
container installed inside the technical area of the sterilizer.
If it is not possible to provide a direct connection to the water mains, optional kit KG66 is available and
provides an external tank for supplying the steam generator, to be connected by means of a flexible hose to
the compression nipple provided on the rear of the sterilizer.
! WARNING!
The connection of the discharge of the sterilizer to the drain should be performed with the
ventilated method. Failure to comply with this recommendation may cause any reverse
flow from the drain to contaminate and/or pollute the chamber of the sterilizer. A simple
check valve is not considered an effective microbiological barrier by the international
CGMP/CGLP standards. To avoid the risk of contamination of the water mains, it is
furthermore recommended to install devices acting as barriers for protection against
reverse flow on the supply line of the vacuum pump. Perform connection to utilities and to
the discharge trap so as to keep the pipes at atmospheric pressure. Check that all the
connectors have their own specific data plate.
1.4.2. CONNECTIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
The sterilizer is available in two versions for connection to a 50- or 60-Hz three-phase power line or to a 50-
or 60-Hz single-phase power line.
The instructions given below should be followed scrupulously in order to ensure that the connection of the
sterilizer to the electrical power supply line is performed according to best manufacturing practice.
! WARNING!
Connection to the electrical mains must be performed by qualified personnel in full compliance
with all the safety requirements prescribed by applicable statutory provisions with reference to
the installation site of the sterilizer. All the connections must be performed with the mains
power fully disconnected.
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 5 / 11 July 2005

! WARNING!
If the ground conductor is connected poorly or not at all, this may severely compromise the
operating safety of the sterilizer. FEDEGARI declines all responsibility arising from poor or
failed connection of the ground conductor.
! WARNING!
The connection of the sterilizer to the electrical mains requires the installation of protection
systems on the electrical power distribution panel. For safety, the installer is recommended to
use a magnetothermal circuit breaker that is sized appropriately according to the maximum
electrical power absorption of the sterilizer.
1.4.2.1. 400 Vac THREE-PHASE VERSION
The sterilizer 400 Vac three-phase 50 or 60Hz with neutral version is supplied complete with the power
supply cable, which has the following characteristics:
Length: 3 meters
Type: Five-wire (R+S+T+N+PE) compliant with the IEC 60227 or IEC 60245 standard
Terminals: Pin terminals
Connection of the power supply cable of the sterilizer to the electrical distribution mains is performed under
the responsibility and care of the client. When performing the connection, it is recommended to follow the
procedure described below:
Phase Activity Wire Identifier Symbol Notes
1 Connection of ground conductor Yellow/Green PE a)
2 Connection of neutral conductor Blue N
3 Connection of phase conductors Black R, S, T
4 Checking correct phase sequence Black R, S, T b)
Note a)
The connection of the ground conductor must ensure mechanical strength and correct electrical conduction
over time. For this purpose, it is recommended to use adequate means for preventing loosening, such as for
example split or toothed washers for connections to rigid structures or bars, and terminals that are certified
for this purpose in the case of connections with loose protective conductors. Moreover, if the power supply
cable is pulled accidentally, the ground conductor must be the last one to disconnect; you should provide an
appropriate excess with respect to the other conductors in order to ensure compliance with this requirement.
Note b)
Checking the correct connection sequence of the R, S and T phases is necessary only if the sterilizer is
equipped with the KG83 kit (Load lifting device), as this is the only three-phase motor that is provided in the
sterilizer. In this case, the motor should be turned briefly in order to identify its direction of rotation. If the
direction of rotation is incorrect, first of all completely disconnect the sterilizer from the power supply mains
and then reverse two of the three phase conductors. Do not reverse the phases for any reason while mains
voltage is present.
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 6 / 11 July 2005

1.4.2.2. 230 Vac SINGLE-PHASE VERSION
The sterilizer 230 Vac single-phase 50 or 60Hz with neutral version is supplied complete with the power
supply cable, which has the following characteristics:
Length: 3 meters
Type: Three-wire (PH+N+PE) compliant with the IEC 60227 or IEC 60245 standard
Terminals: Pin terminals
Connection of the power supply cable of the sterilizer to the electrical distribution mains is performed under
the responsibility and care of the client. When performing the connection, it is recommended to follow the
procedure described below:
Phase Activity Wire identifier Symbol Notes
1 Connection of ground conductor Yellow/Green PE a)
2 Connection of neutral conductor Blue N
3 Connection of phase conductor Brown PH
Note a)
The connection of the ground conductor must ensure mechanical strength and correct electrical conduction
over time. For this purpose, it is recommended to use adequate means for preventing loosening, such as for
example split or toothed washers for connections to rigid structures or bars, and terminals that are certified
for this purpose in the case of connections with loose protective conductors. Moreover, if the power supply
cable is pulled accidentally, the ground conductor must be the last one to disconnect; you should provide an
appropriate excess with respect to the other conductors in order to ensure compliance with this requirement.
1.5. INSTALLING THE LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83)
Sterilizers of the FVG series can be equipped with a load lifting device (optional kit KG83), which is
particularly useful when the load to be handled is composed of heavy items and falls within the scope of
workplace safety regulations.
The horizontal movement of the swinging arm of the winch is manual; vertical movement is instead provided
by means of an electric motor. For safety reasons, the movement of the winch arm is stopped when the
control pushbutton is released. The winch structure and the arm are made of AISI 304 stainless steel.
Fig. 1.5.c - FVG3 equipped with

Fig. 1.5.a Lifting device Fig. 1.5.b Coupling accessory
lifting device
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 7 / 11 July 2005

If the KG83 option is requested by the customer at order time, the lifting device is ready for mounting by
means of 2 threaded inserts, which are spot-welded to the internal supporting frame.
If the KG83 option is requested by the customer after the purchase of the sterilizer, the installation technician
shall have to provide the holes in the outer wall and insert the threaded inserts.
The KG83 optional kit is composed of the structure of the lifting device, complete with the electrical
components and all the accessory materials needed to allow correct assembly of the kit.
1.5.1. MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY
1.5.1.1. MOUNTING ON PREPARED STERILIZER
Remove the rear closure panel by loosening

the fixing screws located at its corners (Fig. 1).
From the same position, locate the
appropriately provided holes in the right side
of the sterilizer frame, suitable for the insertion
of the coupling screws.
Using these holes as a template, mark the
drilling position of the side panel. Drill the Fig. 2
panel using a 9 mm bit.
Loosen the 4 upper screws and the 8 lateral
screws that fix the housing (1) to the frame of
the lifting device (Fig. 2-3-4).
Remove the housing from the supporting
frame.
Fig. 1
Mate the supporting frame of the lifting device
with the sterilizer body by inserting (from the Fig. 3
inside outward) the two supplied hex head
screws (2) in the appropriately provided holes
located at the two inserts that are spot-welded
to the supporting frame of the lifting device
(Fig. 4).
Insert the supplied washers (3) between the
head of the screws (2) and the frame of the
sterilizer and insert the supplied Teflon
spacers (4) between the lateral closure panel
of the sterilizer and the frame of the lifting
device. Tighten fully the screws (2) (Fig. 4).
Insert the two power supply cables in the
technical area of the sterilizer (refer to
Electrical Wiring subsection).
Replace the housing on the supporting frame
and fix it by means of the 4 upper screws and
the 8 lateral screws (Fig. 2-3).
Reassemble the rear closure panel of the
sterilizer by using the fixing screws located at
its corners (Fig. 1).
Fig. 4
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 8 / 11 July 2005

1.5.1.2. MOUNTING ON NON-PREPARED STERILIZER
Remove the rear and left closure panels

by loosening the fixing screws arranged
at their corners (Fig. 1-2).
Loosen the 4 upper screws and the 8
lateral screws that fix the housing (1) to
the frame of the lifting device (Fig. 4-5-6).
Remove the housing from the supporting
frame (Fig. 5).
Place thee lifting device next to the
sterilizer and align it (Fig. 3).
Using the holes in the lifting device frame
as template, mark the drilling position of
the sterilizer frame. Drill the frame with a Fig. 1 Fig. 2
9 mm bit.
Replace the left closure panel of the
sterilizer by using the fixing screws
located at its corners. Using the holes
just drilled in the sterilizer frame as a
template, mark the drilling position of the
side panel. Drill the panel with a 9 mm
bit.
Mate the supporting frame of the lifting
device with the sterilizer body by inserting
(from the inside outward) the two Fig. 3
supplied hex head screws (2) in the
appropriately provided holes located at
the two inserts that are spot-welded to
the supporting frame of the lifting device
(Fig. 6).
Insert the supplied washers (3) between
the head of the screws (2) and the frame
of the sterilizer and insert the supplied
Teflon spacers (4) between the lateral
closure panel of the sterilizer and the
Fig. 4
frame of the lifting device. Tighten fully
the screws (2) (Fig. 6).
Insert the two power supply cables in the
technical area of the sterilizer (refer to
Electrical Wiring subsection).
Replace the housing on the supporting
frame and fix it by means of the 4 upper
screws and the 8 lateral screws (Fig. 2-
3).
Reassemble the rear closure panel of the Fig. 5
sterilizer by using the fixing screws
located at its corners (Fig. 1).
Fig. 6
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 9 / 11 July 2005

1.5.2. ELECTRICAL WIRING
! WARNING!
Disconnect the sterilizer from the electrical power supply before accessing the inside of the
electrical panel.
Please note that switching off the sterilizer by means of its built-in circuit breaker does not
isolate the machine completely from the power supply line. The power supply conductors and
their input terminals are live with mains voltage even when the circuit breaker is deactivated
(OFF position).
The lifting device is provided with two cables for connection to the electrical system of the sterilizer.
The first cable has a polarized five-pole connector and is connected to the three-phase power supply line of
the sterilizer.
The second two-pole cable is connected to the single-phase, 24-V power supply line.
The following procedure should be used to connect them:
Remove the front closure panel of the sterilizer

by loosening the fixing screws arranged at its
corners (Fig. 1).
Remove the closure panel of the electrical panel
by loosening the 8 screws arranged on the sides
(Fig. 2).
Locate terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal strip X1,
located in the lower region of the electrical panel
(Fig. 3).
Insert the two-pole conductor from the lifting
device into the electrical panel by passing
through the provided cable clamp (Fig. 4). Fig.1 Fig.2
Pull out the terminal strip X1 located in the
electrical panel, which comprises terminals 1 and
2, and connect the respective poles of the two-
pole conductor from the lifting device to these
terminals. Replace the terminal strip in its seat
(Fig. 3).
Replace the electrical panel closure panel by
tightening the 8 screws arranged on the sides
(Fig. 2).
On the left lateral part of the electrical panel, Fig. 3 Fig. 4
locate the socket provided for inserting the five-
pole polarized connector fitted on the cable that
arrives from the lifting device. Insert the
connector in the socket and operate the locking
bracket (Fig. 5).
Fix the cables for mutually connecting the lifting
device and the sterilizer by means of suitable
adhesive straps, taking care to place the straps
on flat and clean surfaces (Fig. 6).
Replace the front closing panel of the sterilizer
and lock it to the frame by tightening the fixing Fig. 5 Fig. 6
screws located at its corners (Fig. 1).
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 10 / 11 July 2005

1.6. CHECKING THE INSTALLATION
Before using the sterilizer normally, a short run-in period is needed. This consists in performing at least two
complete cycles while the machine is empty.
During the run-in period, check and search for any anomalies.
The sterilizer can be introduced in the normal production cycle only after these checks have had a positive
outcome.
If anomalies in operation are detected, contact the manufacturer immediately.
; CAUTION
In accordance with the laws applicable in the destination Country, the connections to the water,
pneumatic and electrical mains must be performed according to best manufacturing practice
and checked under the Users responsibility.
; CAUTION
In accordance with the laws applicable in the destination Country, pressure equipment must be
checked under the Users responsibility by an assigned inspection authority.
ID no. 84503 Rev. 2 11 / 11 July 2005

SECTION 3 DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS
SECTION 3
DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS
ID no. 84504 Rev. 2 1/2 July 2005

SECTION 3 DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS
TABLE OF DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS
DRAWING/DIAGRAM MODEL DOCUMENT NO.
FVG1/2 GA100018
Installation drawing
FVG3 GA100017
FVG1/2 GM011268
Hydraulic diagram
FVG3 GM011122
FVG1/2 83834
List of hydraulic diagram
components
FVG3 83833
Electrical diagram FVG1/2/3 GN011254
ID no. 84504 Rev. 2 2/2 July 2005

VERTICAL AUTOCLAVE FVG1-2 ID no. 83834
P&ID CODE GM011268 Rev. 1
PART LIST
CODE TECHNICAL MAINTENANC
STANDARDS AND SPARE DATA E DATA
TAG FUNCTION DESCRIPTION GRP
TECHNICAL DATA PART SHEET SHEET
ASSEMBLY PART (STC) (SMC)
BASIC MACHINE
B001 Compressed air tank Tank - 352 GM250463 GL500196 - - -
B002 Recovery D.I. water Tank - - GL500231 - - - -
CR001 Compressor vent Hand valve - 352 GM250463 CB020137 - STC0244 -
CR002 Compressor tank vent Hand valve - 352 GM250463 CB100022 - STC0372 -
CV14 Electrocompressor Piston oil-less 220V 50Hz - 0.175 kW 361 GM250472 CF040013 - STC0363 -
D001 Steam generator Tank 220-230V - 7 kW - GL200070 - - - SMC0084
E006 Chamber drain Solenoid valve 24V DC OT - 27W - 1/4" 356 GM250467 CJ000099 KK000281 STC0366 -
E007 Chamber condensate drain Solenoid valve 24V DC OT - 27W - 1/4" 356 GM250467 CJ000098 KK000281 STC0365 -
E008 Charge steam in chamber Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" 395 GM250481 CJ000100 KK000281 STC0365 -
E010 Charge air in chamber Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" 395 GM250481 CJ000100 KK000281 STC0365 -
E012 Charge air gasket Solenoid valve 5/2 24V CC - GM802571 CJ000015 - STC0107 -
F008 Chamber drain Filter - - GM300184 GM300202 - - SMC0077
FC01 Chamber control flange Flange ISPSEL / TEV - - PM102531 - - -
FC02 Steam generator control flange Flange ISPSEL / TEV - - PM102531 - - -
Electronic level - - - CD050024 - STC0423 -
L001 Steam generator MAX level
Level probe - - GM700077 PM600012 KK000080 - -
L002 Steam generator MIN level
L003 Water tank MIN level Electronic level - - - CD050012 - STC0378 -
L004 Water tank MAX level Floating level - - - CB100021 - STC0374 -
M001 Chamber pressure Manometer 40 - 1,5 bar - 1/8" - - CH010052 - STC0026 -
M002 Gasket pressure Manometer 40 - 0/10 bar - 1/8" - - CH010039 - STC0026 -
M003 Steam generator pressure Manometer 40 - 1/6 bar - 1/8" - - CH010053 - STC0026 -
1/4
PART LIST
M014 Compressor pressure Manometer 40 - 0/10 bar - 1/8" - - CH010039 - STC0026 -

P001 Chamber pressure Transducer 1/4"GAS M - GM802571 CD230037 - STC0376 -
P002 Gasket MAX pressure Pressure switch - - GM802571 CD240004 CC050008 STC0030 -
P003 Gasket MIN pressure Pressure switch - - GM802571 CD240005 CC050008 STC0030 -
P004 Steam generator pressure Pressure switch - - - CD240057 - STC0309 SMC0084
P005 Chamber pressure Pressure switch - - GP400198 CD200026 - STC0048 SMC0076
P006 Compressor pressure Pressure switch - - - CD240042 - STC0216 -
PA01 Water feeding Pump 220V 50Hz-0.4 l/min-4 bar - GM802466 CF030176 - STC0379 -
R001 Non-return air gasket Check valve - - - CJ080042 - STC0394 -
R002 Non-return chamber drain Check valve DN 1/2" 356 GM250467 GM350240 KK000255 - SMC0059
R004 Non-return water charge Check valve - - GM802571 CJ080039 - STC0373 -
R005 Non-return air charge Check valve 1/4" 361 GM250472 CJ080026 - STC0157 -
R007 Non-return steam gener. water Check valve 1/2'' - GM802415 GM350255 - - SMC0059
RX02 Heating elements Heating element 220V 50 Hz - 7 Kw - GM550096 - - STC0381 SMC0084
T001 Chamber temperature Pt100 flexible 4,8 3m - - PM600045 KK000111 STC0001 SMC0080
T003 Steam generator temperature Thermostat - - - CD220008 - STC0153 -
VM Chamber pressure drain Hand valve INOX 1/4" F-F - GM150174 CJ070047 - STC0237 SMC0079
VM6 Steam generator drain Hand valve 1/4" F-F - GM802415 CJ070001 - STC0093 -
VM7 Chamber drain Hand valve 1/4" F-F 356 GM250467 CJ070001 - STC0093 -
VR01 Air gasket reducer Air filter reducer M5-10bar(IN)-0,5/7bar(OUT) - GM802571 CC120034 - STC0109 -
W001 Drying cycle exchanger Exchanger INOX - GL400658 - - STC0409 -
Y001 Chamber overpressure Safety valve 97/23 CE (PED) - - CJ060366 - STC0362 SMC0078
Y002 Steam generator overpressure Safety valve 97/23 CE (PED) 395 GM250481 CJ060365 - STC0362 SMC0078
2/4
PART LIST
Z001 Door closing positioning Microswitch - - GF170172 CD200033 - STC0045 SMC0074

KG41 OPTIONAL AIR COMPRESSOR
F007 Sterile air filter Cartridge - - - CC120035 - STC0097 -
KG50 CONDENSATE COOLER
W002 Drain cooler Fan cooler 230V 50/60 Hz - 16/14W - - CJ090081 - STC0369 -
KG64 CONDENSATE RECOVERY SYSTEM WITH STERILE FILTER AIR
B004 Condensate drain recovery Tank - - - GM802691 - - -
KG65 PRE-VACUUM SYSTEM
E014 Vacuum line isolation Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" - - CJ000100 - STC0365 -
PV01 Vacuum pump Membrane pump 230V 50/60 Hz-50W-0,6A - GM802652 CF030191 - STC0370 -
R006 Non-return vacuum pump Check valve 1/4" - - CJ080026 - STC0157 -
KG66 TANK SYSTEM WATER FEED FOR STEAM GENERATOR
B003 Recovery D.I. water Plastic box PET 15 lt. 367 GM250478 CK070015 - STC0380 -
L005 Tank MIN level Electronic level - 367 GM250478 CD340115 - STC0368 -
KG81 PROCESS PRINTER
- Printer Thermal printer - - - CE020017 - STC0138 SMC0081
KG83 BASKET EMPTING SYSTEM
ME15 Load lifting device Electric motor - - GU020200 CF020026 - STC0408 -
Z003 Lower end-stroke position Proximity - - GU020200 CD200053 - STC0371 -
Z004 Upper end-stroke position Proximity - - GU020200 CD200053 - STC0371 -
0 Control Pushbutton station - - GU020200 CD330080 - - -
KG90 VALIDATION PROBE NOZZLE
- Validation sensor port Flanged/TRI-CLOVER DN35 ASTM/TC 50,5 - GM101234 - KK000318 - -
3/4
PART LIST
- Adapter for validation port Nozzle DN35-DN22 - - PM102669 - - -
4/4
VERTICAL AUTOCLAVE FVG3 ID no. 83833
PART LIST

BASIC MACHINE
B001 Compressed air tank Tank - 352 GM250463 GL500196 - - -
B002 Recovery D.I. water Tank - - GL500231 - - - -
CR001 Compressor vent Hand valve - 352 GM250463 CB020137 - STC0244 -
CR002 Compressor tank vent Hand valve - 352 GM250463 CB100022 - STC0372 -
D001 Steam generator Tank 220-230V - 7 kW - GL200070 - - - SMC0084
E006 Chamber drain Solenoid valve 24V DC OT - 27W - 1/4" 356 GM250467 CJ000099 KK000281 STC0366 -
E007 Chamber condensate drain Solenoid valve 24V DC OT - 27W - 1/4" 356 GM250467 CJ000098 KK000281 STC0365 -
E008 Charge steam in chamber Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" 364 GM250475 CJ000100 KK000281 STC0365 -
E010 Charge air in chamber Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" 364 GM250475 CJ000100 KK000281 STC0365 -
F008 Chamber drain Filter - - GM300184 GM300202 - - SMC0077
FC01 Chamber control flange Flange ISPSEL / TEV - - PM102531 - - -
FC02 Steam generator control flange Flange ISPSEL / TEV - - PM102531 - - -
L001 Steam generator MAX level
L002 Steam generator MIN level
L003 Water tank MIN level Electronic level - - - CD050012 - STC0378 -
L004 Water tank MAX level Floating level - - - CB100021 - STC0374 -
M001 Chamber pressure Manometer 40 - 1,5 bar - 1/8" - - CH010052 - STC0026 -
M002 Gasket pressure Manometer 40 - 0/10 bar - 1/8" - - CH010039 - STC0026 -
1/3
PART LIST

M003 Steam generator pressure Manometer 40 - 1/6 bar - 1/8" - - CH010053 - STC0026 -
M014 Compressor pressure Manometer 40 - 0/10 bar - 1/8" - - CH010039 - STC0026 -
P001 Chamber pressure Transducer 1/4"GAS M - GM802571 CD230037 - STC0376 -
P002 Gasket MAX pressure Pressure switch - - GM802571 CD240004 CC050008 STC0030 -
P003 Gasket MIN pressure Pressure switch - - GM802571 CD240005 CC050008 STC0030 -
P004 Steam generator pressure Pressure switch - - - CD240057 - STC0309 SMC0084
P005 Chamber pressure Pressure switch - - GP400198 CD200026 - STC0048 SMC0076
P006 Compressor pressure Pressure switch - - - CD240042 - STC0216 -
PA01 Water feeding Pump 220V 50Hz-0.4 l/min-4 bar - GM802466 CF030176 - STC0379 -
R001 Non-return air gasket Check valve - - - CJ080042 - STC0394 -
R002 Non-return chamber drain Check valve DN 1/2" 356 GM250467 GM350240 KK000255 - SMC0059
R004 Non-return water charge Check valve - - GM802571 CJ080039 - STC0373 -
R005 Non-return air charge Check valve 1/4" 352 GM250463 CJ080026 - STC0157 -
R007 Non-return steam gener. water Check valve 1/2'' - GM802415 GM350255 - - SMC0059
RX02 Heating elements Heating element 220V 50 Hz - 7 Kw - GM550096 - - STC0381 SMC0084
T001 Chamber temperature Pt100 flexible 4,8 3m - - PM600045 KK000111 STC0001 SMC0080
T003 Steam generator temperature Thermostat - - - CD220008 - STC0153 -
VM Chamber pressure drain Hand valve INOX 1/4" F-F - GM150174 CJ070047 - STC0237 SMC0079
VM6 Steam generator drain Hand valve 1/4" F-F - GM802415 CJ070001 - STC0093 -
VM7 Chamber drain Hand valve 1/4" F-F 356 GM250467 CJ070001 - STC0093 -
VR01 Air gasket reducer Air filter reducer M5-10bar(IN)-0,5/7bar(OUT) - GM802571 CC120034 - STC0109 -
W001 Drying cycle exchanger Exchanger INOX - GL400649 - - STC0375 -
Y001 Chamber overpressure Safety valve 97/23 CE (PED) - - CJ060366 - STC0362 SMC0078
Y002 Steam generator overpressure Safety valve 97/23 CE (PED) 364 GM250475 CJ060365 - STC0362 SMC0078
2/3
PART LIST

Z001 Door closing positioning Microswitch - - GF170172 CD200033 - STC0045 SMC0074

KG41 OPTIONAL AIR COMPRESSOR
KG50 CONDENSATE COOLER
W002 Drain cooler Fan cooler 230V 50/60 Hz - 16/14W - - CJ090081 - STC0369 -
KG65 PRE-VACUUM SYSTEM
E014 Vacuum line isolation Solenoid valve 24V DC INOX - 17W - 1/4" - - CJ000100 - STC0365 -
PV01 Vacuum pump Membrane pump 230V 50/60 Hz-50W-0,6A - GM802652 CF030191 - STC0370 -
R006 Non-return vacuum pump Check valve 1/4" - - CJ080026 - STC0157 -
KG66 TANK SYSTEM WATER FEED FOR STEAM GENERATOR
B003 Recovery D.I. water Plastic box PET 15 lt. 367 GM250478 CK070015 - STC0380 -
L005 Tank MIN level Electronic level - 367 GM250478 CD340115 - STC0368 -
KG81 PROCESS PRINTER
- Printer Thermal printer - - - CE020017 - STC0138 SMC0081
KG83 BASKET EMPTING SYSTEM
ME15 Load lifting device Electric motor - - GU020200 CF020026 - STC0408 -
Z003 Lower end-stroke position Proximity - - GU020200 CD200053 - STC0371 -
Z004 Upper end-stroke position Proximity - - GU020200 CD200053 - STC0371 -
0 Control Pushbutton station - - GU020200 CD330080 - - -
KG90 VALIDATION PROBE NOZZLE
- Validation sensor port Flanged/TRI-CLOVER DN35 ASTM/TC 50,5 - GM101234 - KK000318 - -
- Adapter for validation port Nozzle DN35-DN22 - - PM102669 - - -
3/3
SECTION 4 PROCESS CONTROLLER
SECTION 4
PROCESS CONTROLLER
Software version: FC02A / FD02A
ID no. 84505 Rev. 1 1 / 32 November 2004

1. USE ..............................................................................................................................4
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 4
1.2. SOFTWARE STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 5
1.3. ACCESS LEVELS................................................................................................................................ 8
1.4. OPERATING PHASES ...................................................................................................................... 10
1.4.1. INITIAL CHECKS....................................................................................................................... 11
1.4.2. POWER-ON ............................................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2.1. LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES ........................................................................... 12
1.4.3. OPERATION ENABLING........................................................................................................... 12
1.4.4. PRODUCT LOADING ................................................................................................................ 13
1.4.4.1. LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC .......................................................................................... 13
1.4.5. PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................................................ 14
1.4.5.1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM ..................................................... 14
1.4.5.2. GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM....................................................... 16
1.4.6. PROGRAM START.................................................................................................................... 17
1.4.6.1. AUXILIARY MESSAGES....................................................................................................... 18
1.4.6.2. PROCESS CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 19
1.4.6.3. PHASE STEP AND CYCLE STOP FUNCTIONS............................................................. 19
1.4.6.4. ALARM MESSAGES ............................................................................................................. 20
1.4.6.5. EMERGENCY PHASE .......................................................................................................... 21
1.4.6.6. END OF PROCESS .............................................................................................................. 21
1.4.7. PRODUCT UNLOADING........................................................................................................... 22
1.4.8. DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF........................................................................................... 22
1.5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 22
1.5.1. PRINTING FUNCTION .............................................................................................................. 22
1.5.2. CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME .......................................................................................... 23
1.5.3. CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL.......................................... 23

1.5.4. AUTODIAGNOSIS ..................................................................................................................... 24
1.5.5. ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 24
1.5.6. AUTOCLAVE DATA................................................................................................................... 25
1.5.7. INITIALIZATION......................................................................................................................... 26
2. ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................27

2.1. ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................ 27
2.2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................................................................... 30

1. USE
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
All the main functions of the sterilizer are managed by a process controller, which is composed of an
integrated PLC and control panel, managed by resident software structured into menus and submenus,
which can be accessed only by entering appropriate passwords.
The permitted access levels allow to access the menus of the software according to a preset hierarchy.
The operator interacts with the machine by means of the control panel and manages the sterilization process
according to nine preset programs, which can be customized according to specific parameters.
The set of main activities that contribute to the treatment of the processed materials for their sterilization is
termed sterilization process, or more commonly sterilization cycle or just cycle.
On the sterilizer, the execution of a cycle consists in the development of a specific program on the process
controller.
The process controller, by means of its own operating system and of the program mentioned above,
coordinates a series of actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids at the various
temperatures and pressures.
This provides the most correct and appropriate transfer of heat energy to the load according to the physical
characteristics of the load itself.
The following main activities are distinguished in the sterilization process:
- Autoclave preparation;
- Load sterilization;
- Cycle end.
Each one of these main activities is composed of further operating processes, which are termed simply
phases. Depending on the programs selected from the menu by the operator, these phases vary in terms of
the physical parameters that characterize the liquids/fluids involved in the process.
The main activities listed above typically comprise the following operating steps:
Autoclave preparation
Power-on and initial checks.
Enabling for operation.
Product loading.
Load sterilization
Parameter setting.
Program start.
Cycle end
Product unloading.
Deactivation or power-off.

For a full discussion of the individual phases, please refer to the OPERATING PHASES subsection.
; CAUTION
Most workplace accidents are caused by failure to comply with the most basic safety rules.
Anyone working on the machine must know perfectly, and observe scrupulously, the safety
rules given in this document.
! WARNING!
The operator must be able to work so that the controls can be reached easily and in the
ergonomically most appropriate position. Always keep the work area clear of auxiliary
equipment that is not related to the sterilizer management operations. Before startup, move all
unauthorized individuals away from the machine.
1.2. SOFTWARE STRUCTURE
The software that resides in the process controller is composed of two fundamental parts:
PLC SOFTWARE
PANEL SOFTWARE
The PLC SOFTWARE supervises all the actions aimed at the components and elements that control the
fluids. In particular, it allows management of:
Machine preparation (Program start).
Cycle (Heating, sterilization, cooling, drying, atmospheric pressure balancing, cycle end, emergency,
and blackout emergency phases).
Autodiagnosis (Reading of digital inputs, reading and forcing of digital outputs, sensing and
calibration of temperature and pressure).
Safe opening and closure of the door (lid).
Enabling of steam generator.
Alarm activation.
Display of system status messages.
NOTE
Access to the PLC software is not allowed.

The PANEL SOFTWARE is organized into menus and submenus according to the following structure:
MAIN MENU
1 PROGRAM START
Select program number: 1-9
Press numeric key
2 CHANGE PARAMETERS
1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS
R1. Minimum sterilization temperature
R2. Sterilization temperature
R3. Maximum sterilization temperature
R4. Sterilization duration
R5. Delay time for heating end sterilization start
R6. Temperature for closure of chamber discharge electric valve
R7. Enable spontaneous cooling
R8. Spontaneous cooling temperature
R9. Enable cooling with injection of compressed air
R10. Cooling temperature with injection of compressed air
R11. Enable drying with injection of compressed air
R12. Duration of drying with injection of compressed air
R13. Timing for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge
R14. Closure time for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge
2. GENERAL PARAMETERS
G1. Maximum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing
G2. Minimum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing
G3. Upper pressure range tolerance for steam injection control
G4. Lower pressure range tolerance for steam injection control
G5. Timing for control of electric valve for steam injection
G6. Closure time for control of electric valve for steam injection
G7. Cycle end time
G8. Enable control of final temperature for door opening
G9. Controlled final temperature
G10. Enable steam generator
G11. Enable printer
G12. Printer timing
G13. Enable automatic cycle start
G14. Enable cycle repetition

3. FACTORY-SET PARAMETERS
1. Autoclave serial number
2. Enable option K41, enhanced compressor
3. Enable option K64, condensate recovery tray
4. Enable option K81, printer
3 I/O AUTODIAGNOSIS
1. DIGITAL INPUTS
2. DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3. ANALOG INPUTS
4. HEAT PROBE CALIBRATION
5. PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
1. PASSWORD MANAGEMENT
1. Password selection
2. Password logout
3. Change password
2. ALARM MANAGEMENT
1. Display alarm list
2. Print list
3. Delete list
3. AUTOCLAVE DATA
1. Serial number
2. Panel software version
3. PLC software version
4. Number of cycles
5. System options
4. LANGUAGE SELECTION
1. Italian
2. English
3. German
4. French
5. Dutch
5. INITIALIZATION
1. Download of parameters from panel to PLC

NOTE
Operator access to panel software is allowed only for specific access levels, which are enabled
by entering appropriate passwords. Please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS subsection.
1.3. ACCESS LEVELS
In order to protect the system and ensure a hierarchy based on reasonably determined skills, access is
allowed only according to different authorization levels by first entering a code, known as password. The
machine allows access according to 5 levels (from 1 to 5).
From each level, it is possible to access the other levels by entering the specific password. Of the 5 access
levels, the first two (1 and 2), termed FEDEGARI DEVELOPER and FEDEGARI PERSONNEL
respectively, are reserved for Fedegari technicians. The other levels (3, 4 and 5), termed USER
SUPERVISOR , USER OPERATOR and STAND-BY, respectively, are reserved to the personnel
assigned to the sterilizer. The following Table describes the association between each level and its operating
functions.
Table 1.3 Levels of access to operating functions
ACCESS LEVELS OPERATING FUNCTIONS

Password input (PSW)
Access to system information (SYS)
1 FEDEGARI DEVELOPER
Date and time correction (TIM)
Direct access to menu pages (PGS)
Access to alarm event list (EVT)
Configuration mode (CFG)
Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS)
Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN)
Alarm acknowledgment (ACK)
2 FEDEGARI PERSONNEL Access to system information (SYS)
Note: Date and time correction (TIM)
10 minutes after the password has been
entered, the system automatically resets
itself and returns to the STAND-BY mode
3 USER SUPERVISOR Access to system information (SYS)
Note: Access to alarm event list (EVT)
In the INS function, it is not possible to Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS)
change the factory-set parameters Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN)
4 USER OPERATOR
Note: Password input (PSW)
In the INS function, it is not possible to
change the general parameters and the
factory-set parameters Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS)
It is not possible to delete the list of alarms Alarm acknowledgment (ACK)
displayed by means of the EVT function.
It is not possible to calibrate the analog
inputs or to force the digital outputs by
means of the autodiagnosis function.


It is not possible to perform the SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION operation
5 STAND-BY Access to system information (SYS)
PSW: Password input (4 digits):

- This function allows to access the system functions that are available for the specific access
level. If an incorrect password is entered, the panel responds by flashing the asterisks and
automatically sets the lowest access level (5, Stand-by).
SYS: System information:

- For setting the contrast of the display.
- For testing the LEDs of the panel.
- For displaying the protocol used to communicate with the PLC.
- To display the charge status of the battery of the panel.
- To display the status of communication with the PLC.
- To display the status of the connection to the printer.
TIM: Panel date/time:

- This function allows to correct the date and time of the panel.
PGS: Direct access to pages:

- This function allows to access directly the pages of the program by entering the page number.
EVT: List of alarm events:

- This function allows to display and print the history list of the last 256 alarm events that have
occurred.
CFG: Configuration mode:

- This function allows to load the software into the panel.
INS: Insert mode:

- This function allows to enter alphanumeric values in the edit fields. The INS function is activated
by pressing the 0 key on the operator panel.
PRN: Print screen function:

- This function allows to produce a printout of the data present in the displayed page.
The function is performed by pressing the 9 key on the operator panel.
ACK: Acknowledgment function:

- This function allows to acknowledge the alarms that require an acknowledgment.

NOTE
The sterilizer is supplied with the following default password already set:
Level 3 User Supervisor 2222
This password enables machine management and parameter changing.
The User Supervisor can also enable the lower levels:
Level 4 User Operator 1111
This password enables machine operation.
Level 5 Stand-by 0000
This password sets the machine to Stand-by mode.
NOTE
For security reasons, the user must always disable his password (by entering the STAND-BY
password, which is 0000) when he stops using the machine and in any case before switching it
off.
The following is an equivalent operation:
Press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) , then

Press the 1 key to select the (PASSWORD MANAGEMENT) menu, then
Press the 2 key to select (PASSWORD LOGOUT), which places the system in STAND-BY.
1.4. OPERATING PHASES
Management of the generic sterilization process by the operator is organized according to the following main
phases:
Initial checks.
Power-on.
Operation enabling.
Product loading.
o Lid opening/closing logic.
Parameter setting.

o Program parameters and changes to them.

o General parameters and changes to them.
Program start and run.

o Auxiliary messages.
o Process control.
o Phase Step and Cycle Stop functions.
o Alarm messages.
o Emergency phase.
o End of process.
Product unloading.
Power-off.
Sequential execution of the operating phases listed above leads to complete processing of the product.
1.4.1. INITIAL CHECKS
Lighting of work area
Check that the work area in the regions where operations are performed is adequately lit (with natural light If
possible), so as to allow immediate identification of the control and monitoring devices of the machine.
Checking connections and initial conditions of the machine
Check that the machine is connected to the electric power supply line.
Check the connection of the water circuit of the machine to the supply tank.
Check the level of the demineralized water inside the tank.
Check the connection of the minimum-level sensor for the water in the tank.
Check that the discharge of the machine is correctly connected to a conveyance system that is suitable to
work at temperatures close to 100 C.
Check that the manual chamber pressure venting valve is closed.
NOTE
The amount of water contained in the tank must be at least equal to 10 liters in order to ensure
complete execution of the sterilization cycle.

1.4.2. POWER-ON
Power supply check
Check that the main switch is engaged (in the I position). If it is on O, power the machine by moving the
lever of the switch to the I position.
Command activation and acquisition
After operating the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, the display of the operator panel
shows, for a few seconds, a video message in English, which specifies the version of the panel firmware and
then shows the main menu, with the list of selectable operating options.
1.4.2.1. LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES
The options provided in the main menu are selected by pressing on the keypad the key that corresponds to
the number shown next to the option.
The main menu is displayed automatically after the controller has been powered.
Access to the other pages is allowed:
By entering the number that corresponds to the selected option from the main menu or from
another menu.
To return to the preceding menu:
Operate the CLEAR key.
1.4.3. OPERATION ENABLING
Enabling the operation of the machine requires the operator to enter a password.
From the main menu:
Press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then

Press the 1 key to select (PASSWORD SELECTION), which allows to enter the PASSWORD.
NOTE
For further information on password management, please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS
subsection.
NOTE
For secrecy reasons, the panel does not echo on the monitor the numeric characters entered.
Accordingly, the password is not shown on the display.

NOTE
If the 0000 password or another unrecognized password is entered in the PSW function, the
system configures itself automatically at the STAND-BY level. To return to the operating
conditions of the machine it is necessary to enter a valid password.
1.4.4. PRODUCT LOADING
1. Extract the heat probe(s) from the sterilization chamber;

2. Insert in the sterilization chamber the baskets that contain the product to be processed;
3. Place the flexible heat probe in the upper basket so that the metallic tips are in contact with the
product.
! WARNING!
Removing bottles in which the internal temperature is still high (above 70C) may entail their
explosion, with severe risks for the integrity of nearby operators.
Accordingly, to sterilize solutions contained in hermetically closed containers, select only
sterilization processes that have an appropriate final load cooling phase and a counterpressure
with sterile air, ensuring safety during load extraction. The safety temperature above which the
lid cannot be opened must be set to a value < 70C and general parameter G8 must be activated
by setting the value 1.
! WARNING!
Use containers of uniform size to sterilize thermolabile products.
! WARNING!
If the product is composed of containers having different dimensions, place the heat probe in
the largest container.
! WARNING!
Make sure that the cable(s) of the heat probe(s) is(are) inserted in the chamber before closing
the lid.
1.4.4.1. LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC
Opening system
Starting the autoclave opening maneuver requires the following conditions to be met:
No process cycle is in progress;
The pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical pressure
switch must both indicate that the pressure inside the chamber has returned equal to the atmospheric
pressure;
The heat probe arranged in the chamber detects a temperature that is lower than the preset safety
temperature: this occurs only if general parameter G8 is set.

Once the clearances indicated above have been received, a clearance provided by the operator
discharges the compressed air from the gasket seat. The lighting of the LED located proximate to the
7 key on the operator panel, which indicates that the lid is open, indicates that it is possible to turn the
lid to extract the load.
Closure system
The lid is turned manually from the open position to the closed position while keeping pressed the safety
lever that releases it.
When the lid has reached the position provided for closure, it releases the lid engagement lever and
simultaneously prevents the lid from rotating and presses the safety limit switch.
The limit switch changes state and authorizes the system to send the command to the electric valves that
allow to introduce compressed air in the gasket seat of the sealing system.
Once the clearance has been obtained from the limit switch and therefore the correct position of the lid is
ensured, an operator command introduces compressed air in the gasket seat, starting the complete closure
of the chamber and the locking of the lid.
Closure of the chamber is reported by the lighting of the LED located next to the 8 key.
If imperfect closure of the lid is detected while a cycle is in progress, a specific alarm message is issued and
the cycle is consequently interrupted, passing to the emergency phase.
1.4.5. PARAMETER SETTING
Each program is constituted by a sequence of elementary modules termed phases.

The development of the program generally consists in arranging in sequence the execution of these phases.
The phases control the components of the sterilizer in order to obtain, in the sterilization chamber, pressures
and temperatures that follow preset functions.
The programs are supplied with a predefined structure of phases arranged in sequences that the operator
can enable by means of appropriate program parameters.
In addition to the program parameters, there is a series of general parameters that control activities and
functions that are common to all programs. These parameters cannot be set by the operator.
1.4.5.1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM
For each program it is possible to customize the phases or change certain parameters that characterize the
activity of a phase so as to allow to choose the required operating configuration. This is done by setting
appropriately provided parameters known as program parameters (R1, R2,....R14).
The program parameters and program names are available for display and modification by accessing the
Change Parameter, Program Parameter menu from the main menu.
The program parameters are listed in the table below.
The meaning of the fields of the table is as follows:
No : parameter identification number;
DESCRIPTION : description of the activities regulated by the parameter;
FUNCTION : name of the parameter;
MIN : minimum value that the parameter can assume;
DEF : default value of the parameter for every program;
MAX : maximum value that the parameter can assume.

The units of measure of the parameters are degrees Celsius (C), minutes (min.) and bars (bar).
Table 1.4.5.1. List of program parameters PROGRAMS 1 9

P P P P P P P P P
No STRING FUNCTION MIN MAX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
This is the temperature value
that, when added to 0.2C,
constitutes the phase end
target of the heating phase.
This is also the minimum
temperature allowed in the
R1 MIN. ST. T C sterilization phase. When the 120 120 120 120 120 134 134 134 134 105 134
temperature in the chamber
drops below this value, the
display shows the STERIL T
LACK alarm and the
sterilization phase time is
suspended.
This is the typical temperature

R2 STERIL. T C reached in the chamber during 121 121 121 121 121 135 135 135 135 105 135
the sterilization phase.
When the temperature in the

chamber during sterilization
R3 MAX. ST. T C reaches this value, the display 122 122 122 122 122 136 136 136 136 105 136
shows the EXCESS STERIL
The alarm.
R4 STERIL t min Duration of sterilization phase. 10 10 20 20 20 10 10 15 20 0 9999
Duration for which the

must stay above the
R5 ST delay t min 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 9
temperature of R1+0.2C
before passing from heating to
This is the temperature set for

automatic closure of the
R6 T closes E6 C 100 100 100 100 110 120 120 120 120 0 136
chamber discharge valve
during the heating phase
SPONT. Allows to activate/deactivate

R7 0/1 the spontaneous cooling 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
COOLING.
phase.
R8 T - SPONT. C Temperature target of the

110 110 110 110 120 110 110 120 120 50 140
spontaneous cooling phase.

P P P P P P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Allows to
R9 AIR COOLING 0/1 activate/deactivate the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
phase of cooling with
injection of compressed air.
R10 T - AIR C Temperature target of the

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 50 140
air cooling phase.
Allows to
R11 DRYING. 0/1 activate/deactivate the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
drying phase.
R12 DRYING t min Time target of the drying 10 10 10 10 15 10 10 10 10 1 99

phase
Sum of the opening and

R13 TIMING t E7 sec closing time of the electric 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 99
valve for discharge
modulation.
TIMING t E7 Closure time of electric

R14 sec valve for discharge 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 99
OFF
modulation.
1.4.5.2. GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM
During the execution of the sterilization program, the operation of the machine is regulated not only by the
program parameters but also by a series of general parameters, which control activities and functionalities
that are common to every sterilization process.
The table below lists the general parameters and includes a brief description of their function.
The meaning of the fields of this table is as follows:
No: parameter identification number
DESCRIPTION: name of the parameter
FUNCTION: description of the activities regulated by the parameter
MIN: minimum value that the parameter can assume
DEF: default value of the parameter
MAX: maximum value that the parameter can assume
Table 1.4.5.2 General parameters
No. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MIN DEF MAX
This is the maximum value that the pressure in the chamber can
G1 MAX.ATM P bar assume during atmospheric balancing and cycle end phases in order 0.50 1.05 1.10
to enable lid opening.
Does not allow to open the door of the sterilization chamber is in

G2 MIN.ATM P bar
vacuum if the pressure is lower than G2 0.50 0,95 1.00

During heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the

chamber is regulated according to the value of this parameter and of
program parameter R2, from which the regulation pressure is 0.00
G3 dP+TOL.E8 bar 0. 03 0.10
obtained.
During the heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the
G4 dP-TOL.E8 bar 0. 02 0. 03 0.10
program parameter R2, from which the regulation pressure is
obtained.
TIMING t E8 The sum of the opening and closure time of the electric valve for
G5 sec 3 7 999
modulating steam injection.
G6 TIMING t E8 OFF sec The closure time of the electric valve for modulating steam injection. 0 5 999
G7 CYCLE END t sec Indicates the duration, in seconds, of the cycle end phase. 0 10 999
This value is to be set to 1 in order to activate control of parameter G9

G8 T CONTROL 0/1 0 0 1
on the heat probe.
This is the temperature (sensed by heat probe T001) above which lid
G9 OPENING T C opening is not allowed. This check is active only if parameter G8 is set 0 70 95
to 1.
This parameter can only assume the values 0 and 1; if it is 0, it

G10 STEAM GEN. D6 0/1 0 0 1
disables the operation of the internal steam generator of the machine.
This parameter enables printing of the data of the cycle during the
G11 PRINTER 0/1 execution of the sterilization program. The value 1 is set only if the 0 0 1
printer is installed on the machine.
This parameter allows to set the printing rate of the cycle data during
the execution of a sterilization program. It is active only if the printer is
G12 PRINT TIMING sec 5 30 9999
present in the machine and the G11 parameter is set to 1. The printing
interval is a function of the phase time.
This parameter can assume only the values 0 and 1; if it is 1, it

G13 AUTOM START 0/1
enables the Automatic Cycle Start function. 0 0 1

G14 REPEAT CYCLE 0/1
enables a single repetition of the cycle. 0 0 1
1.4.6. PROGRAM START
The machine is provided with 9 customizable programs constituted by the same sequence of phases, to be
used for sterilization of the product.
These 9 programs are contained in the PROGRAM START menu, which can be selected under the MAIN
MENU by means of the 1 key.
The sterilizer enters the initial preparation phase, during which it performs certain checks automatically.
During this phase, the program performs no actuation o the elements or components of the sterilizer.
The actual start of the sterilization cycle is achieved by acting on the START key.

NOTE
All the programs are supplied with the default value of each parameter, which is assumed by
the system if the operator does not change it.
! WARNING!
if the machine is provided with a condensate recovery tank (K64), when the program is
selected, a message is displayed which requests confirmation that the tank has been
emptied.
Before continuing, the program checks the logic of the lid system, ensuring that the actions performed by the
operator are compatible with the safety conditions in the chamber. During execution, the program can no
longer be stopped (until the sterilization process ends), except by:
a manual cycle stop command, by pressing the 5 key, which leads to the emergency phase;
the occurrence of an alarm (caused by a malfunction during the sterilization process) which leads to
the emergency phase;
an interruption caused by a blackout, which brings the sterilizer to a phase termed blackout
emergency, which is characterized by a suspended state that ensures the safety of the autoclave, of
the personnel and of the load.
Exit from the emergency states, passing directly to the final phases of the cycle (pressure balancing and
cycle end), is possible by acting on the 2 key.
NOTE
It is the operators task to prepare sterilization programs that are compatible with the
components installed on the machine and are suitable for the load to be processed. The
software on the sterilizer does not allow the user to select phases and programs or functions
that are not allowed by the P&ID configuration of the machine.
1.4.6.1. AUXILIARY MESSAGES
Auxiliary messages are short text strings shown on the display in specific screens, which report to the
operator the status of the machine, of the doors and the outcome of the sterilization/test.
The following table lists the auxiliary messages and the screens in which they can be displayed:
Table 1.4.6.1 Auxiliary messages
AUXILIARY MESSAGES
displayed in screens:
Main menu Preparation
DOOR OPEN ! READY TO START
OK DOOR OPENING DOOR OPEN !
OK DOOR OPENING
GENERATOR NOT READY
AUTOMATIC START
REPEAT IN PROGRESS (RP)

1.4.6.2. PROCESS CONTROL
Once the cycle has started, the data related to the sterilization process in progress are shown on the display.
The display includes and provides to the operator information according to two main classes. The first class
is termed control parameters and provides useful information (characteristic data for identifying the program
and its phase in progress), preset threshold values (pressure, temperature, time) and, for these last values,
the extent of the values acquired and processed in real time in the sterilization chamber.
The second class relates to information termed alarm messages and auxiliary messages.
Control data
The process page, during each phase, provides the operator with the following data:
The number of the program being executed, preceded by the letter P;
The name of the phase in progress;
The preset threshold value (pressure, temperature or time) that is the target value of the phase in
progress and starts the next phase, preceded by the flashing => indicator;
The temperature (in degrees) detected in the sterilization chamber by the heat probe TE;
The pressure (in bar) measured by the pressure transducer TP;
The phase time t;
The sterilization time ts.
If the printer is present and enabled for printing, the process information listed above is shown on the display
and also printed at each phase start. Then, with the printing rate set in the general parameters, the process
information is printed, without including the program number, the name of the phase, and the phase target.
1.4.6.3. PHASE STEP AND CYCLE STOP FUNCTIONS
During the execution of the sterilization program, until the process is ended, normal operating interaction is
disabled.
It is in any case possible to intervene on the process in progress by activating specific functions (PHASE
STEP and STOP-CYCLE) described below.
PHASE STEP function

This function is activated by pressing the 4 key. This function allows to force the transition to the next
operating step, blocking the commands and actuations related to the operating phase in progress, without
waiting to reach the set end-of-phase value with display and printout of the P/S KEY OPERATED alarm.
CYCLE STOP function

This function is activated by pressing the 5 key. This allows to pass to the emergency phase with display
and printout of the CYCLE STOP KEY OPERATED alarm.
! WARNING!
Using the 5 key is highly dangerous for the load in the case of containers that are not closed
hermetically but are protected by filters: the pressure differential would cause the liquids to
boil.
Accordingly, press the 5 key after checking that the pressure in the chamber has reached
atmospheric pressure values spontaneously and that the product temperature is lower than
70C.

The PHASE STEP and CYCLE STOP functions are active in all phases, except for the ones listed in the
following table.
Table 1.4.6.3 - Phase Step and Cycle Stop clearances
PHASE PROG. PHASE STEP CYCLE STOP

Preparation all no No
Atmospheric pressure balancing all yes (*) No
Cycle end all no No
Emergency all no No
Blackout emergency all no No
Cooling 1-9 no yes
(*) It is necessary to press the 4 key to allow the forced exit of the cycle, after pressing the 5 key in
the EMERGENCY phase, if the machine is unable to perform atmospheric pressure balancing.
1.4.6.4. ALARM MESSAGES
The sterilizer provides various alarms, which are shown on the display with a brief description and are
printed in real time if the printout option is enabled by means of the general parameters (G11).
The occurrence of an alarm is reported not only visually but also by activating an acoustic signal, which can
be muted by pressing the ENTER key.
If acknowledgment of the alarm in progress (ACK) is required, the operator must keep the ENTER key
pressed for a few seconds.
The alarms are termed system alarms when they involve or general safety conditions or instruments or
phase alarms if they are linked to the execution of specific phases.
The higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process,
interrupt the cycle, causing immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept
in a safe and suspended state.
In this EMERGENCY phase, the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the pressure balancing phase
and to the consequent cycle end.
The following table lists the alarm messages and the associated management.
Table 1.4.6.4 Alarm messages
ALARM DESCRIPTION LOG ACK PRN ON PRN OFF

1. Excessive sterilization temperature X X X
2. Insufficient sterilization temperature X X X
3. Excessive temperature in chamber X X X
4. Excessive pressure in chamber X X X
5. Temperature transducer malfunction X X X
6. Pressure transducer malfunction X X X
7. Lack of water in generator X X X
8. Door open alarm X X X


9. Door system alarm X X X
10. Phase step button operated X X
11. Cycle stop button operated X X
12. Blackout detected X X
13. Printer error X X
14. Panel battery drained X X
LOG: Logs the alarm in the history list

ACK: Requires acknowledgment of the alarm by the operator
PRN ON: Prints the alarm when it is activated
PRN OFF: Prints the alarm when it is deactivated
! WARNING!
The operator must be instructed correctly and extensively regarding the meaning and
important of the alarms that can occur on the machine.
1.4.6.5. EMERGENCY PHASE
The emergency phase occurs in the sterilizer when the following events occur:
A malfunction during the sterilization process;

A restart of the machine after an interruption caused by a blackout;
An activation of the manual CYCLE STOP command.
Activation of the emergency phase closes all the valves and stops all the motors, setting the autoclave in
standby mode.
This suspended state ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.
! WARNING!
Activation of the STOP key in the Emergency phase allows to move on to the atmospheric
pressure balancing and cycle end phases. Before moving on to the atmospheric pressure
balancing phase, check that the pressure and temperature conditions allow the maneuver
without causing damage to the load. In particular, if the load is constituted by liquids, it must
be allowed to cool before pressing the STOP key.
1.4.6.6. END OF PROCESS
Once the program has reached the last defined phase (CYCLE END), the acoustic warning is activated, and
the LED arranged to the side of the STOP key starts flashing. After a preset time (phase end target) has
elapsed, or by activating the STOP key, the sterilization program ends, the display shows the MAIN MENU,
and if the printer is present and enabled, the final cycle data are printed.

1.4.7. PRODUCT UNLOADING
1. Open the lid as follows:
Press the 7 key on the keypad, producing the automatic discharge of the air from the
sealing gasket seat;
Check that the LED associated with the 7 key lights up;
Press the lever, which disengages the lid from the mechanical locking system;
Turn the lid horizontally until it reaches the fully open position;
Transfer the load from the chamber, removing the flexible heat probe;
Place the heat probe inside the empty sterilization chamber.
1.4.8. DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF
The sterilizer can be stopped and switched off only by turning the main switch.
Halting and power-off is achieved by returning the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, to
the O position.
NOTE
Before deactivating the machine, remember to enter the STAND-BY password (0000).
An equivalent operation is:

Press the 2 to select (PASSWORD LOGOUT), which places the system in STANDBY.
1.5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Some functions of the sterilizer are active even when a normal sterilization cycle is not being performed.
These functions are typically dedicated to printing the parameters related to the sterilization cycle and to
changing certain general parameters, such as the date and time, or to checking that the operator panel is
functional.
Not all auxiliary functions are freely usable by the operator. The key information is provided below for each of
these functions.
1.5.1. PRINTING FUNCTION
The printer with which the machine is equipped allows to print the data of the cycle.
The enabling of data printing and the printing rate are preset in the general parameter page.
The following information is included in the print report, in the following order:
1. HEADING
FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI
DATE AND TIME of program start

SERIAL NUMBER of the autoclave

Space for notes
2. PROGRAM NUMBER AND LIST OF PROGRAM PARAMETERS
3. CYCLE DATA
These data correspond to the data shown on the display and are printed at a preset rate (calculated
on the phase time).
4. ALARM REPORTS:
DATE and TIME of alarm recording
STATE OF ALARM detected (ON, OFF)
ALARM NAME
5. FINAL DATA
CYCLE NUMBER (progressive cycle number)
CYCLE DURATION (total cycle time)
STERILIZATION TIME (time of exposure to correct temperatures during the sterilization
phase)
DATE AND TIME (program end time)
SIGNATURE (Space for signature of operator and supervisor)
When no cycles are running, the page shown on the display can be printed by pressing the 9 key.
1.5.2. CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME
(This option is available to the operator only at the User Supervisor level).
The operator panel is provided with an internal clock, which runs constantly and is powered by a battery that
keeps the date and time up-to-date even when no mains power is available.
It is in any case possible, if necessary, to set or change the current date and time:
From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds; the display shows the panel
function menu;
Select the TIM parameter by using the R and L keys;
Press ENTER to confirm the selection; the monitor shows the fields that contain the system date
and time;
Enter the chosen numeric value in the highlighted field by using the keypad;
Press ENTER to move to the next field and then repeat the above operation if necessary;
Press CLEAR to return to the main menu.
1.5.3. CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL
The machine is equipped with a software tool that allows to perform an online check of the functionality of
the Operator Panel.

This check allows to verify the operation of the battery of the operator panel, of the LEDs, the status of the
communication of the panel with the PLC and with the printer (if installed); this check also allows to adjust
the brightness of the display.
To check the operator panel:
From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds: the panel function menu is shown on
the display;
Operate the R and L keys until the SYS function is highlighted;
Press ENTER to confirm the option selected on the monitor: the autodiagnosis page of the panel is
displayed;
Operate the U and D to select the various options;
Select the DISPLAY line; to change the brightness of the display, press the R and L keys;
After highlighting the line related to the battery, check the operating status of the battery;
After highlighting the PLC line, check the status of the connection of the panel to the PLC by
means of the corresponding message;
After highlighting the PRINTER line, check the status of the connection of the printer to the panel
by means of the corresponding message;
1.5.4. AUTODIAGNOSIS
(This option is available to the operator only in display mode).

The process controller is provided with a diagnostic tool, termed AUTODIAGNOSIS, which allows to check:
The values of the parameters related to the digital input/output channels;
The analog inputs of the system.
The autodiagnosis function can be accessed by means of the main menu:
press the 3 key to enter (AUTODIAGNOSIS) and then;

press the 1 key to select (DIGITAL INPUTS);
press the 2 key to select (DIGITAL OUTPUTS);
press the 3 key to select (ANALOG INPUTS);
press the 4 key to select (TEMPERATURE PROBE CALIBRATION);
press the 5 key to select (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION).
1.5.5. ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT
The alarm history can be accessed by means of the main menu:
press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then;

press the 2 key to select the (ALARM MANAGEMENT) menu, then;
press the 1 key to select (DISPLAY LIST);
press the 2 key to select (PRINT LIST);
press the 3 key to select (DELETE LIST) function not allowed to the operator.

As an alternative, it is possible to access the alarm history by activating the EVT function from the panel
function menu. This allows to display a specific page in which a keypad command can display in each
instance the other previously occurred alarms, starting from the last detected alarm.
The page lists, for each alarm that has occurred:
The progressive number;
The STATUS transition type that has been affected by the detected condition:
* ON = alarm onset;
* OFF = deactivation;
* ACK = acknowledgment.
The description of the alarm condition that has occurred;
The date and time when the alarm occurred.
To display the alarm list page on the monitor, proceed as follows:
Access the main menu;

Press ENTER (for at least two seconds): the panel function menu is displayed;
Select the EVT function by acting on the R and L keys;
Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected option. This displays the most recent alarm;
Operate the U key to display the other logged alarms.
NOTE
By pressing the 9 key, all the detected alarms are printed, starting from the first displayed
alarm up to the most recent alarms. Access to the alarm list page is not allowed if no alarms
have been logged in the memory area.
NOTE
The maximum number of alarms that can be logged in the history is 256; if this limit is
exceeded, the excess messages replace the oldest ones.
1.5.6. AUTOCLAVE DATA
By pressing the 4 key from the Main Menu and then the 3 key from the Special Functions menu, the
AUTOCLAVE DATA option is selected, giving access to the page that lists the general data of the sterilizer:
Table 1.5.6. Autoclave data
DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTIC
Serial number Can be entered only by Fedegari personnel
Panel software version Fixed
PLC software version Fixed
Number of cycles performed by the machine Automatic, not modifiable
Enabling/disabling of optional kit K41 Can be performed only by Fedegari personnel

1.5.7. INITIALIZATION
It is possible to access the menu that allows to transfer the parameters to the Process Controller by means
of the main menu (this option is not available to the operator):
press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) and then;

press the 4 to enter (INITIALIZATION);
a confirmation is requested in order to proceed with the data transfer by means of the ENTER key, then;
the flashing message INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS is displayed at the end;
the system resumes displaying the main menu.
NOTE
The INITIALIZATION operation must be performed only during installation. The unintentional
activation of this function does not compromise the functionality of the system.

2. ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1. ALARMS
The sterilizer reports certain alarms, which are displayed with a brief description and are printed if the printer
is operating correctly and the corresponding function is activated.
The occurrence of an alarm is reported visually and also by activating an acoustic alarm.
The alarms are defined as:
System alarms, if they affect safety instruments or general safety conditions

Phase alarms, if they are related to the execution of specific phases
Cycle alarms, if they can occur only during a cycle in progress and are not linked to specific phases
Higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process,
interrupt the cycle, with immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a
safe and suspended state.
Pressing the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase and to
the consequent cycle end.
All the alarms identify operating anomalies that can be solved spontaneously or require technical
intervention.
The machine described in this manual can activate the alarms listed in the following Table.
NOTE
The abbreviations TE and TP that occur in the alarm messages refer to the heat probe
and to the pressure transducer, respectively.
NOTE
Some alarms require operator acknowledgment (flashing ACK message).

Press the ENTER key for at least 2 seconds to eliminate the alarm acknowledgment
message.
The meaning of the columns of the Table is as follows:

- No. : alarm number;

- ALARM : alarm message;
- CAUSE : description of the abnormal condition detected by the controller;
- TYPE : type of alarm;
- DELAY : alarm activation delay;
- RESULT : action produced by the alarm on the sterilizer;
- BUZ : buzzer;
- PRINT ON : printout (alarm onset);
- PRINT OFF : printout (alarm deactivation);
- ACK : request to acknowledge the alarm.
Table 2.1 List of alarms

PRN PRN
No. ALARM CAUSE TYPE DELAY RESULT BUZ ACK
ON OFF
During the sterilization

phase, the temperature in Phase
1 STERIL T EXCESS the chamber exceeds the Display X X X
maximum sterilization
temperature (R3).

Display
phase, the temperature in
and
2 STERIL T LACK the chamber drops below Phase X X X
steril.
the minimum sterilization
time held
temperature (R1).
The process controller

Display
CHAMBER T detects in the chamber a
3 EXCESS
Cycle and X X X
temperature above the
EMERG
allowed limit (138C).
Display
CHAMBER P Fixed threshold of 4 bar
4 EXCESS
Cycle and X X X
abs is exceeded
EMERG

detects in the chamber a
Display
temperature that exceeds
5 TE FAULT System 5 and X X X
the measurement range of
EMERG
the heat probe or is
receiving no signal from it.

Display
pressure that exceeds the
6 TP FAULT System 5 and X X X
measurement range of the
EMERG
pressure transducer or is

PRN PRN
N ALARM CAUSE TYPE DELAY RESULT BUZ ACK
ON OFF
The controller receives

from the minimum-level
sensor the signal that
indicates lack of water in
GENERATOR H2O
7 LACK
the steam generator. System 60 Display X X X
Note: this alarm is enabled
only if the steam generator
is active (parameter G10
=1)
While a cycle is in
progress, the process
controller detects Display
8 DOOR OPEN imperfect closure of the lid Cycle 5 and X X X
(lack of signal from EMERG
inflated-gasket pressure
switch).

detects an operating
Display
DOOR SYSTEM anomaly on the inputs
9 ALARM
System 5 and X X X
(limit switches and
EMERG
pressure switches of the
door system).
Displayed and printed Display

during the execution of a and
10 P/S KEY OPERATED Cycle X X
cycle after activating the Phase
PHASE STEP function. end
Displayed and printed

during the execution of a Display
CYCLE STOP KEY
11 OPERATED
cycle after the activation of Cycle and X X
the CYCLE STOP EMERG
function.
Display
Displayed and printed,
BLACKOUT and
12 DETECTED
when a cycle is restarted, Cycle X X
B.O.
following a blackout.
EMERG.
The printer is not available

13 PRINTER ERROR even though option K81=1 System 10 Display X X
and G11=1.
Activation if battery is
drained or missing.
PANEL BATTER
14 DRAINED
This alarm is activated System Display X X
before the battery is
completely drained.
! WARNING!
importance of the alarms that can occur on the machine.

2.2. TROUBLESHOOTING
This subsection provides information on finding and identifying the faults that can occur in the sterilizer
(occurrence of alarms, generation of abnormal vibration and noise).
! WARNING!
Every intervention on the machine, including access to electrically live parts and to the primary
supply lines, must be performed by specialized personnel of the manufacturer FEDEGARI or by
personnel authorized by FEDEGARI.
2.2.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The following table lists the most frequent symptoms of malfunction that can occur during the use of the
sterilizer. The possible causes and any corrective actions are given for each symptom.
Table 2.2.1 - Troubleshooting
Ref. No.
DESCRIPTION PROBABLE CAUSES POSSIBLE REMEDIES
ALARM
a) Malfunction of generator a) Identify the fault.

pressure switch.
During the sterilization phase, the b) Malfunction of heat probe b) Identify the faulty element
temperature inside the chamber or pressure transducer. and replace it.
exceeds the sterilization
1 temperature plus the sterilization c) The heat probe or the c) Calibrate the system on the
tolerance. The display shows the pressure sensor are not signal that arrives from the
alarm message STERIL T calibrated appropriately. heat probe or from the
EXCESS. pressure transducer.
d) The sensor signal
conversion module is not d) Identify the faulty element
operating correctly. and replace it.
a) Incorrect operation of a) Identify the malfunction of

steam generator the steam generator.
During the sterilization phase, b) Failure of heat probe or b) Identify the faulty element
the temperature inside the pressure transducer. and replace it.
chamber drops below the
2 sterilization temperature. c) The heat probe or the c) Calibrate the system on the
pressure sensor are not signal that arrives from the
The display shows the alarm calibrated appropriately. heat probe or from the
message STERIL. T LACK. transducer.
The process controller detects,
a) Malfunction of electric a) Repair or replace the
inside the chamber, a
valve for loading steam into electric valve.
temperature that exceeds the
the chamber.
allowed limit.
The display shows the alarm b) Failure to close of the b) Repair or replace the feed
3
message EXCESS CHAMBER T. valve for feeding saturated valve.
The cycle in progress is steam to the chamber.
interrupted and immediate
transition to the emergency
phase occurs.

Ref. No.
ALARM
The process controller detects, a) Malfunction of the heat a) Identify the faulty
inside the chamber, a probe TE or of the module component by using the
temperature that exceeds the for converting the signal autodiagnosis functions,
measurement range of the heat detected by the probe. repair it, or replace it.
probe.
5
The display shows the alarm
message TE FAULT .
The cycle is interrupted and

immediate transition to the
emergency phase occurs
The process controller detects, a) Malfunction of the a) Identify the faulty

inside the chamber, a pressure pressure transducer or of component by using the
that exceeds the measurement the module for converting autodiagnosis functions,
range of the pressure the signal detected by the repair it, or replace it.
transducer. transducer.
6
message TP FAULT

emergency phase occurs.
a) The water supply is a) Restore the demineralized

unavailable. water supply.
One probably cause can
be, in addition to b) Repair or replace the pump.
unavailability of the water
supply, the presence of air c) Check the line for supplying
bubbles in the pump intake water to the independent
duct. If so, remove steam generator.
pressure from the
The controller receives from
generator by opening the d) Once the faulty component
the level sensor the signal that
manual valve (remember to has been found, repair it or
indicates lack of water in the
close it again after draining replace it. Replace the level
independent steam generator.
7 is complete). Once this sensor.
operation is complete, the
The alarm message
supply of deionized water
GENERATOR H2O LACK is
can be restored.
displayed.
b) The water pump that
supplies the independent
steam generator is faulty.
c) The supply valves are dirty

or faulty.
d) The level sensor is faulty.

Ref. No.
ALARM
While a cycle is in progress, a) Malfunction of the pressure a) Replace the pressure

the process controller switch that senses high switch
detects imperfect closure of pressure in the lid gasket.
the lid:
b) Lack of compressed air in
8 The display shows the alarm lid gasket. b) Check the compressed air
message DOOR OPEN. supply circuit. Once the
defective component has
The cycle is interrupted and been found, repair it or
immediate transition to the replace it.
a) The printer has been a) Disable the printer.

enabled (K81=1, G11=1) but
The display shows the is not present on the
13 message PRINTER sterilizer. b) Check the connections of
ERROR. the printer to the controller
b) The printer is not powered. and to the electrical
system.
a) Internal short circuit. a) Using the electrical

diagram, find and eliminate
the fault.
b) The electrical cabinet is b) Close the electrical cabinet

The sterilizer cannot be by operating its key.
open.
- started because the main
switch trips repeatedly.
c) Remove the reason why the
resistors were running dry
c) The thermostat that protects or with an insufficient water
the resistors of the level.
generator has tripped.
a) Fault in the regulating a) Replace the pressure

pressure switch. switch.
After starting the cycle, the
controller does not receive
b) Malfunction of the heating
- the clearance signal
system of the independent b) Check the efficiency of the
indicating that the generator
generator. electrical resistors and of
is ready.
the electric circuits that
supply power to them.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
SECTION 4
PROCESS CONTROLLER
Software version: FC02B / FD02B
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 1 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1. USE ..............................................................................................................................4
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 4
1.2. SOFTWARE STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 5
1.3. ACCESS LEVELS................................................................................................................................ 8
1.4. OPERATING PHASES ...................................................................................................................... 10
1.4.1. INITIAL CHECKS....................................................................................................................... 11
1.4.2. POWER-ON ............................................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2.1. LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES ........................................................................... 12
1.4.3. OPERATION ENABLING........................................................................................................... 12
1.4.4. PRODUCT LOADING ................................................................................................................ 13
1.4.4.1. LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC .......................................................................................... 13
1.4.5. PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................................................ 14
1.4.5.1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM ..................................................... 14
1.4.5.2. GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM....................................................... 16
1.4.6. PROGRAM START.................................................................................................................... 17
1.4.6.1. AUXILIARY MESSAGES....................................................................................................... 18
1.4.6.2. PROCESS CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 19
1.4.6.3. PHASE STEP AND CYCLE STOP FUNCTIONS............................................................. 19
1.4.6.4. ALARM MESSAGES ............................................................................................................. 20
1.4.6.5. EMERGENCY PHASE .......................................................................................................... 21
1.4.6.6. END OF PROCESS .............................................................................................................. 21
1.4.7. PRODUCT UNLOADING........................................................................................................... 22
1.4.8. DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF........................................................................................... 22
1.5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 22
1.5.1. PRINTING FUNCTION .............................................................................................................. 22
1.5.2. CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME .......................................................................................... 23
1.5.3. CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL.......................................... 23

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 2 / 33 Luglio 2005
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.5.4. AUTODIAGNOSIS ..................................................................................................................... 24
1.5.5. ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 24
1.5.6. AUTOCLAVE DATA................................................................................................................... 25
1.5.7. INITIALIZATION......................................................................................................................... 26
2. ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................27

2.1. ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................ 27
2.2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................................................................... 30
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 3 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1. USE
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
All the main functions of the sterilizer are managed by a process controller, which is composed of an
integrated PLC and control panel, managed by resident software structured into menus and submenus,
which can be accessed only by entering appropriate passwords.
The permitted access levels allow to access the menus of the software according to a preset hierarchy.
The operator interacts with the machine by means of the control panel and manages the sterilization process
according to nine preset programs, which can be customized according to specific parameters.
The set of main activities that contribute to the treatment of the processed materials for their sterilization is
termed sterilization process, or more commonly sterilization cycle or just cycle.
On the sterilizer, the execution of a cycle consists in the development of a specific program on the process
controller.
The process controller, by means of its own operating system and of the program mentioned above,
coordinates a series of actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids at the various
temperatures and pressures.
This provides the most correct and appropriate transfer of heat energy to the load according to the physical
characteristics of the load itself.
The following main activities are distinguished in the sterilization process:
- Autoclave preparation;
- Load sterilization;
- Cycle end.
Each one of these main activities is composed of further operating processes, which are termed simply
phases. Depending on the programs selected from the menu by the operator, these phases vary in terms of
the physical parameters that characterize the liquids/fluids involved in the process.
The main activities listed above typically comprise the following operating steps:
Autoclave preparation
Power-on and initial checks.
Enabling for operation.
Product loading.
Load sterilization
Parameter setting.
Program start.
Cycle end
Product unloading.
Deactivation or power-off.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 4 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
For a full discussion of the individual phases, please refer to the OPERATING PHASES subsection.
; CAUTION
Most workplace accidents are caused by failure to comply with the most basic safety rules.
Anyone working on the machine must know perfectly, and observe scrupulously, the safety
rules given in this document.
! WARNING!
The operator must be able to work so that the controls can be reached easily and in the
ergonomically most appropriate position. Always keep the work area clear of auxiliary
equipment that is not related to the sterilizer management operations. Before startup, move all
unauthorized individuals away from the machine.
1.2. SOFTWARE STRUCTURE
The software that resides in the process controller is composed of two fundamental parts:
PLC SOFTWARE
PANEL SOFTWARE
The PLC SOFTWARE supervises all the actions aimed at the components and elements that control the
fluids. In particular, it allows management of:
Machine preparation (Program start).
Cycle (Heating, sterilization, cooling, drying, atmospheric pressure balancing, cycle end, emergency,
and blackout emergency phases).
Autodiagnosis (Reading of digital inputs, reading and forcing of digital outputs, sensing and
calibration of temperature and pressure).
Safe opening and closure of the door (lid).
Enabling of steam generator.
Alarm activation.
Display of system status messages.
NOTE
Access to the PLC software is not allowed.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 5 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
The PANEL SOFTWARE is organized into menus and submenus according to the following structure:
MAIN MENU
1 PROGRAM START
Select program number: 1-9
Press numeric key
2 CHANGE PARAMETERS
1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS
R1. Enable prevacuum
R2. Vacuum pressure
R3. Timed vacuum duration
R4. Minimum sterilization temperature
R5. Sterilization temperature
R6. Maximum sterilization temperature
R7. Sterilization duration
R8. Delay time for heating end sterilization start
R9. Temperature for closure of chamber discharge electric valve
R10. Enable spontaneous cooling
R11. Spontaneous cooling temperature
R12. Enable cooling with injection of compressed air
R13. Cooling temperature with injection of compressed air
R14. Enable drying with injection of compressed air
R15. Duration of drying with injection of compressed air
R16. Timing for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge
R17. Closure time for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge
2. GENERAL PARAMETERS
G1. Maximum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing
G2. Minimum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing
G3. Upper pressure range tolerance for steam injection control
G4. Lower pressure range tolerance for steam injection control
G5. Timing for control of electric valve for steam injection
G6. Closure time for control of electric valve for steam injection
G7. Cycle end time
G8. Enable control of final temperature for door opening
G9. Controlled final temperature
G10. Enable steam generator
G11. Enable printer
G12. Printer timing
G13. Enable automatic cycle start
G14. Enable cycle repetition
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 6 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3. FACTORY-SET PARAMETERS
1. Autoclave serial number
2. Enable option KG41, enhanced compressor
3. Enable option KG64, condensate recovery tray
4. Enable option KG65, vacuum pump
5. Enable option KG81, printer
3 I/O AUTODIAGNOSIS
1. DIGITAL INPUTS
2. DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3. ANALOG INPUTS
4. HEAT PROBE CALIBRATION
5. PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
1. PASSWORD MANAGEMENT
1. Password selection
2. Password logout
3. Change password
2. ALARM MANAGEMENT
1. Display alarm list
2. Print list
3. Delete list
3. AUTOCLAVE DATA
1. Serial number
2. Panel software version
3. PLC software version
4. Number of cycles
5. System options
4. LANGUAGE SELECTION
1. Italian
2. English
3. German
4. French
5. Dutch
5. INITIALIZATION
1. Download of parameters from panel to PLC
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 7 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
NOTE
Operator access to panel software is allowed only for specific access levels, which are enabled
by entering appropriate passwords. Please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS subsection.
1.3. ACCESS LEVELS
In order to protect the system and ensure a hierarchy based on reasonably determined skills, access is
allowed only according to different authorization levels by first entering a code, known as password. The
machine allows access according to 5 levels (from 1 to 5).
From each level, it is possible to access the other levels by entering the specific password. Of the 5 access
levels, the first two (1 and 2), termed FEDEGARI DEVELOPER and FEDEGARI PERSONNEL
respectively, are reserved for Fedegari technicians. The other levels (3, 4 and 5), termed USER
SUPERVISOR , USER OPERATOR and STAND-BY, respectively, are reserved to the personnel
assigned to the sterilizer. The following Table describes the association between each level and its operating
functions.
Table 1.3 Levels of access to operating functions

1 FEDEGARI DEVELOPER
Direct access to menu pages (PGS)
Configuration mode (CFG)
2 FEDEGARI PERSONNEL Access to system information (SYS)
Note: Date and time correction (TIM)
10 minutes after the password has been
entered, the system automatically resets
itself and returns to the STAND-BY mode
3 USER SUPERVISOR Access to system information (SYS)
Note: Access to alarm event list (EVT)
In the INS function, it is not possible to Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS)
change the factory-set parameters Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN)
4 USER OPERATOR
Note: Password input (PSW)
In the INS function, it is not possible to
change the general parameters and the
factory-set parameters Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS)
It is not possible to delete the list of alarms Alarm acknowledgment (ACK)
displayed by means of the EVT function.
It is not possible to calibrate the analog
inputs or to force the digital outputs by
means of the autodiagnosis function.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 8 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL

It is not possible to perform the SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION operation
5 STAND-BY Access to system information (SYS)
PSW: Password input (4 digits):

- This function allows to access the system functions that are available for the specific access
level. If an incorrect password is entered, the panel responds by flashing the asterisks and
automatically sets the lowest access level (5, Stand-by).
SYS: System information:

- For setting the contrast of the display.
- For testing the LEDs of the panel.
- For displaying the protocol used to communicate with the PLC.
- To display the charge status of the battery of the panel.
- To display the status of communication with the PLC.
- To display the status of the connection to the printer.
TIM: Panel date/time:

- This function allows to correct the date and time of the panel.
PGS: Direct access to pages:

- This function allows to access directly the pages of the program by entering the page number.
EVT: List of alarm events:

- This function allows to display and print the history list of the last 256 alarm events that have
occurred.
CFG: Configuration mode:

- This function allows to load the software into the panel.
INS: Insert mode:

- This function allows to enter alphanumeric values in the edit fields. The INS function is activated
by pressing the 0 key on the operator panel.
PRN: Print screen function:

- This function allows to produce a printout of the data present in the displayed page.
The function is performed by pressing the 9 key on the operator panel.
ACK: Acknowledgment function:

- This function allows to acknowledge the alarms that require an acknowledgment.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 9 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
NOTE
The sterilizer is supplied with the following default password already set:
Level 3 User Supervisor 2222
This password enables machine management and parameter changing.
The User Supervisor can also enable the lower levels:
Level 4 User Operator 1111
This password enables machine operation.
Level 5 Stand-by 0000
This password sets the machine to Stand-by mode.
NOTE
For security reasons, the user must always disable his password (by entering the STAND-BY
password, which is 0000) when he stops using the machine and in any case before switching it
off.
The following is an equivalent operation:
Press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) , then

Press the 2 key to select (PASSWORD LOGOUT), which places the system in STAND-BY.
1.4. OPERATING PHASES
Management of the generic sterilization process by the operator is organized according to the following main
phases:
Initial checks.
Power-on.
Operation enabling.
Product loading.
o Lid opening/closing logic.
Parameter setting.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 10 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
o Program parameters and changes to them.

o General parameters and changes to them.
Program start and run.

o Auxiliary messages.
o Process control.
o Phase Step and Cycle Stop functions.
o Alarm messages.
o Emergency phase.
o End of process.
Product unloading.
Power-off.
Sequential execution of the operating phases listed above leads to complete processing of the product.
1.4.1. INITIAL CHECKS
Lighting of work area
Check that the work area in the regions where operations are performed is adequately lit (with natural light If
possible), so as to allow immediate identification of the control and monitoring devices of the machine.
Checking connections and initial conditions of the machine
Check that the machine is connected to the electric power supply line.
Check the connection of the water circuit of the machine to the supply tank.
Check the level of the demineralized water inside the tank.
Check the connection of the minimum-level sensor for the water in the tank.
Check that the discharge of the machine is correctly connected to a conveyance system that is suitable to
work at temperatures close to 100 C.
Check that the manual chamber pressure venting valve is closed.
NOTE
The amount of water contained in the tank must be at least equal to 10 liters in order to ensure
complete execution of the sterilization cycle.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 11 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4.2. POWER-ON
Power supply check
Check that the main switch is engaged (in the I position). If it is on O, power the machine by moving the
lever of the switch to the I position.
Command activation and acquisition
After operating the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, the display of the operator panel
shows, for a few seconds, a video message in English, which specifies the version of the panel firmware and
then shows the main menu, with the list of selectable operating options.
1.4.2.1. LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES
The options provided in the main menu are selected by pressing on the keypad the key that corresponds to
the number shown next to the option.
The main menu is displayed automatically after the controller has been powered.
Access to the other pages is allowed:
By entering the number that corresponds to the selected option from the main menu or from
another menu.
To return to the preceding menu:
Operate the CLEAR key.
1.4.3. OPERATION ENABLING
Enabling the operation of the machine requires the operator to enter a password.
From the main menu:

Press the 1 key to select (PASSWORD SELECTION), which allows to enter the PASSWORD.
NOTE
For further information on password management, please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS
subsection.
NOTE
For secrecy reasons, the panel does not echo on the monitor the numeric characters entered.
Accordingly, the password is not shown on the display.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 12 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
NOTE
If the 0000 password or another unrecognized password is entered in the PSW function, the
system configures itself automatically at the STAND-BY level. To return to the operating
conditions of the machine it is necessary to enter a valid password.
1.4.4. PRODUCT LOADING
1. Extract the heat probe(s) from the sterilization chamber;

2. Insert in the sterilization chamber the baskets that contain the product to be processed;
3. Place the flexible heat probe in the upper basket so that the metallic tips are in contact with the
product.
! WARNING!
Removing bottles in which the internal temperature is still high (above 70C) may entail their
explosion, with severe risks for the integrity of nearby operators.
Accordingly, to sterilize solutions contained in hermetically closed containers, select only
sterilization processes that have an appropriate final load cooling phase and a counterpressure
with sterile air, ensuring safety during load extraction. The safety temperature above which the
lid cannot be opened must be set to a value < 70C and general parameter G8 must be activated
by setting the value 1.
! WARNING!
Use containers of uniform size to sterilize thermolabile products.
! WARNING!
If the product is composed of containers having different dimensions, place the heat probe in
the largest container.
! WARNING!
Make sure that the cable(s) of the heat probe(s) is(are) inserted in the chamber before closing
the lid.
1.4.4.1. LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC
Opening system
Starting the autoclave opening maneuver requires the following conditions to be met:
No process cycle is in progress;
The pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical pressure
switch must both indicate that the pressure inside the chamber has returned equal to the atmospheric
pressure;
The heat probe arranged in the chamber detects a temperature that is lower than the preset safety
temperature: this occurs only if general parameter G8 is set.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 13 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Once the clearances indicated above have been received, a clearance provided by the operator
discharges the compressed air from the gasket seat. The lighting of the LED located proximate to the
7 key on the operator panel, which indicates that the lid is open, indicates that it is possible to turn the
lid to extract the load.
Closure system
The lid is turned manually from the open position to the closed position while keeping pressed the safety
lever that releases it.
When the lid has reached the position provided for closure, it releases the lid engagement lever and
simultaneously prevents the lid from rotating and presses the safety limit switch.
The limit switch changes state and authorizes the system to send the command to the electric valves that
allow to introduce compressed air in the gasket seat of the sealing system.
Once the clearance has been obtained from the limit switch and therefore the correct position of the lid is
ensured, an operator command introduces compressed air in the gasket seat, starting the complete closure
of the chamber and the locking of the lid.
Closure of the chamber is reported by the lighting of the LED located next to the 8 key.
If imperfect closure of the lid is detected while a cycle is in progress, a specific alarm message is issued and
the cycle is consequently interrupted, passing to the emergency phase.
1.4.5. PARAMETER SETTING
Each program is constituted by a sequence of elementary modules termed phases.

The development of the program generally consists in arranging in sequence the execution of these phases.
The phases control the components of the sterilizer in order to obtain, in the sterilization chamber, pressures
and temperatures that follow preset functions.
The programs are supplied with a predefined structure of phases arranged in sequences that the operator
can enable by means of appropriate program parameters.
In addition to the program parameters, there is a series of general parameters that control activities and
functions that are common to all programs. These parameters cannot be set by the operator.
1.4.5.1. PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM
For each program it is possible to customize the phases or change certain parameters that characterize the
activity of a phase so as to allow to choose the required operating configuration. This is done by setting
appropriately provided parameters known as program parameters (R1, R2,....R14).
The program parameters and program names are available for display and modification by accessing the
Change Parameter, Program Parameter menu from the main menu.
The program parameters are listed in the table below.
The meaning of the fields of the table is as follows:
No : parameter identification number;
DESCRIPTION : description of the activities regulated by the parameter;
FUNCTION : name of the parameter;
MIN : minimum value that the parameter can assume;
DEF : default value of the parameter for every program;
MAX : maximum value that the parameter can assume.
The units of measure of the parameters are degrees Celsius (C), minutes (min.) and bars (bar).
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 14 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Table 1.4.5.1. List of program parameters PROGRAMS 1 9

P P P P P P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R1 PREVACUUM 0/1 Allows to activate/deactivate 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

the prevacuum phase.
Pressure target of the

R2 P vacuum bar 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.20 1.10
prevacuum phase.
Duration of the timed vacuum

R3 t vacuum min 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 99
phase.
This is the temperature value

that, when added to 0.2C,
constitutes the phase end
target of the heating phase.
This is also the minimum
temperature allowed in the
R4 MIN. ST. T C sterilization phase. When the 120 120 120 120 120 134 134 134 134 105 134
drops below this value, the
display shows the STERIL T
LACK alarm and the
sterilization phase time is
suspended.
This is the typical temperature

R5 STERIL. T C reached in the chamber during 121 121 121 121 121 135 135 135 135 105 135
When the temperature in the

chamber during sterilization
R6 MAX. ST. T C reaches this value, the display 122 122 122 122 122 136 136 136 136 105 136
shows the EXCESS STERIL
The alarm.
R7 STERIL t min Duration of sterilization phase. 10 10 20 20 20 10 10 15 20 0 9999
Duration for which the

must stay above the
R8 ST delay t min 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 9
temperature of R1+0.2C
before passing from heating to
This is the temperature set for

automatic closure of the
R9 T closes E6 C 100 100 100 100 110 120 120 120 120 0 136
chamber discharge valve
during the heating phase
SPONT. Allows to activate/deactivate

R10 0/1 the spontaneous cooling 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
COOLING.
phase.
R11 T - SPONT. C Temperature target of the

110 110 110 110 120 110 110 120 120 50 140
spontaneous cooling phase.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 15 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
P P P P P P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Allows to
R12 AIR COOLING 0/1 activate/deactivate the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
phase of cooling with
injection of compressed air.
R13 T - AIR C Temperature target of the

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 50 140
air cooling phase.
Allows to
R14 DRYING. 0/1 activate/deactivate the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
drying phase.
R15 DRYING t min Time target of the drying 10 10 10 10 15 10 10 10 10 1 99

phase
Sum of the opening and

R16 TIMING t E7 sec closing time of the electric 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 99
valve for discharge
modulation.
TIMING t E7 Closure time of electric

R17 sec valve for discharge 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 99
OFF
modulation.
1.4.5.2. GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM
During the execution of the sterilization program, the operation of the machine is regulated not only by the
program parameters but also by a series of general parameters, which control activities and functionalities
that are common to every sterilization process.
The table below lists the general parameters and includes a brief description of their function.
The meaning of the fields of this table is as follows:
No: parameter identification number
DESCRIPTION: name of the parameter
FUNCTION: description of the activities regulated by the parameter
MIN: minimum value that the parameter can assume
DEF: default value of the parameter
MAX: maximum value that the parameter can assume
Table 1.4.5.2 General parameters
This is the maximum value that the pressure in the chamber can
G1 MAX.ATM P bar assume during atmospheric balancing and cycle end phases in order 0.50 1.05 1.10
to enable lid opening.
Does not allow to open the door of the sterilization chamber is in

G2 MIN.ATM P bar 0.50 0.95 1.00
vacuum if the pressure is lower than G2
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 16 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
During heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the

G3 dP+TOL.E8 bar 0.00 0.03 0.10
obtained.
During the heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the
G4 dP-TOL.E8 bar 0.02 0.03 0.10
obtained.
TIMING t E8 The sum of the opening and closure time of the electric valve for
G5 sec 3 7 999
modulating steam injection.
G6 TIMING t E8 OFF sec The closure time of the electric valve for modulating steam injection. 0 5 999
G7 CYCLE END t sec Indicates the duration, in seconds, of the cycle end phase. 0 10 999
This value is to be set to 1 in order to activate control of parameter G9

G8 T CONTROL 0/1 0 0 1
on the heat probe.
This is the temperature (sensed by heat probe T001) above which lid
G9 OPENING T C opening is not allowed. This check is active only if parameter G8 is set 0 70 95
to 1.
This parameter can only assume the values 0 and 1; if it is 0, it

G10 STEAM GEN. D6 0/1 0 0 1
disables the operation of the internal steam generator of the machine.
This parameter enables printing of the data of the cycle during the
G11 PRINTER 0/1 execution of the sterilization program. The value 1 is set only if the 0 0 1
printer is installed on the machine.
This parameter allows to set the printing rate of the cycle data during
the execution of a sterilization program. It is active only if the printer is
G12 PRINT TIMING sec 5 30 9999
present in the machine and the G11 parameter is set to 1. The printing
interval is a function of the phase time.

G13 AUTOM START 0/1 0 0 1
enables the Automatic Cycle Start function.

G14 REPEAT CYCLE 0/1 0 0 1
enables a single repetition of the cycle.
1.4.6. PROGRAM START
The machine is provided with 9 customizable programs constituted by the same sequence of phases, to be
used for sterilization of the product.
These 9 programs are contained in the PROGRAM START menu, which can be selected under the MAIN
MENU by means of the 1 key.
The sterilizer enters the initial preparation phase, during which it performs certain checks automatically.
During this phase, the program performs no actuation o the elements or components of the sterilizer.
The actual start of the sterilization cycle is achieved by acting on the START key.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 17 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
NOTE
All the programs are supplied with the default value of each parameter, which is assumed by
the system if the operator does not change it.
! WARNING!
if the machine is provided with a condensate recovery tank (K64), when the program is
selected, a message is displayed which requests confirmation that the tank has been
emptied.
Before continuing, the program checks the logic of the lid system, ensuring that the actions performed by the
operator are compatible with the safety conditions in the chamber. During execution, the program can no
longer be stopped (until the sterilization process ends), except by:
a manual cycle stop command, by pressing the 5 key, which leads to the emergency phase;
the occurrence of an alarm (caused by a malfunction during the sterilization process) which leads to
the emergency phase;
an interruption caused by a blackout, which brings the sterilizer to a phase termed blackout
emergency, which is characterized by a suspended state that ensures the safety of the autoclave, of
the personnel and of the load.
Exit from the emergency states, passing directly to the final phases of the cycle (pressure balancing and
cycle end), is possible by acting on the 2 key.
NOTE
It is the operators task to prepare sterilization programs that are compatible with the
components installed on the machine and are suitable for the load to be processed. The
software on the sterilizer does not allow the user to select phases and programs or functions
that are not allowed by the P&ID configuration of the machine.
1.4.6.1. AUXILIARY MESSAGES
Auxiliary messages are short text strings shown on the display in specific screens, which report to the
operator the status of the machine, of the doors and the outcome of the sterilization/test.
The following table lists the auxiliary messages and the screens in which they can be displayed:
Table 1.4.6.1 Auxiliary messages
AUXILIARY MESSAGES
displayed in screens:
Main menu Preparation
DOOR OPEN ! READY TO START
OK DOOR OPENING DOOR OPEN !
OK DOOR OPENING
GENERATOR NOT READY
AUTOMATIC START
REPEAT IN PROGRESS (RP)
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 18 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4.6.2. PROCESS CONTROL
Once the cycle has started, the data related to the sterilization process in progress are shown on the display.
The display includes and provides to the operator information according to two main classes. The first class
is termed control parameters and provides useful information (characteristic data for identifying the program
and its phase in progress), preset threshold values (pressure, temperature, time) and, for these last values,
the extent of the values acquired and processed in real time in the sterilization chamber.
The second class relates to information termed alarm messages and auxiliary messages.
Control data
The process page, during each phase, provides the operator with the following data:
The number of the program being executed, preceded by the letter P;
The name of the phase in progress;
The preset threshold value (pressure, temperature or time) that is the target value of the phase in
progress and starts the next phase, preceded by the flashing => indicator;
The temperature (in degrees) detected in the sterilization chamber by the heat probe TE;
The pressure (in bar) measured by the pressure transducer TP;
The phase time t;
The sterilization time ts.
If the printer is present and enabled for printing, the process information listed above is shown on the display
and also printed at each phase start. Then, with the printing rate set in the general parameters, the process
information is printed, without including the program number, the name of the phase, and the phase target.
1.4.6.3. PHASE STEP AND CYCLE STOP FUNCTIONS
During the execution of the sterilization program, until the process is ended, normal operating interaction is
disabled.
It is in any case possible to intervene on the process in progress by activating specific functions (PHASE
STEP and STOP-CYCLE) described below.
PHASE STEP function

This function is activated by pressing the 4 key. This function allows to force the transition to the next
operating step, blocking the commands and actuations related to the operating phase in progress, without
waiting to reach the set end-of-phase value with display and printout of the P/S KEY OPERATED alarm.
CYCLE STOP function

This function is activated by pressing the 5 key. This allows to pass to the emergency phase with display
and printout of the CYCLE STOP KEY OPERATED alarm.
! WARNING!
Using the 5 key is highly dangerous for the load in the case of containers that are not closed
hermetically but are protected by filters: the pressure differential would cause the liquids to
boil.
Accordingly, press the 5 key after checking that the pressure in the chamber has reached
atmospheric pressure values spontaneously and that the product temperature is lower than
70C.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 19 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
The PHASE STEP and CYCLE STOP functions are active in all phases, except for the ones listed in the
following table.
Table 1.4.6.3 - Phase Step and Cycle Stop clearances
PHASE PROG. PHASE STEP CYCLE STOP

Preparation all no No
Atmospheric pressure balancing all yes (*) No
Cycle end all no No
Emergency all no No
Blackout emergency all no No
Cooling 1-9 no yes
(*) It is necessary to press the 4 key to allow the forced exit of the cycle, after pressing the 5 key in
the EMERGENCY phase, if the machine is unable to perform atmospheric pressure balancing.
1.4.6.4. ALARM MESSAGES
The sterilizer provides various alarms, which are shown on the display with a brief description and are
printed in real time if the printout option is enabled by means of the general parameters (G11).
The occurrence of an alarm is reported not only visually but also by activating an acoustic signal, which can
be muted by pressing the ENTER key.
If acknowledgment of the alarm in progress (ACK) is required, the operator must keep the ENTER key
pressed for a few seconds.
The alarms are termed system alarms when they involve or general safety conditions or instruments or
phase alarms if they are linked to the execution of specific phases.
The higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process,
interrupt the cycle, causing immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept
in a safe and suspended state.
In this EMERGENCY phase, the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the pressure balancing phase
and to the consequent cycle end.
The following table lists the alarm messages and the associated management.
Table 1.4.6.4 Alarm messages

1. Excessive sterilization temperature X X X
2. Insufficient sterilization temperature X X X
3. Excessive temperature in chamber X X X
4. Excessive pressure in chamber X X X
5. Temperature transducer malfunction X X X
6. Pressure transducer malfunction X X X
7. Lack of water in generator X X X
8. Door open alarm X X X
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 20 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL

9. Door system alarm X X X
10. Phase step button operated X X
11. Cycle stop button operated X X
12. Blackout detected X X
13. Printer error X X
14. Panel battery drained X X
LOG: Logs the alarm in the history list

ACK: Requires acknowledgment of the alarm by the operator
PRN ON: Prints the alarm when it is activated
PRN OFF: Prints the alarm when it is deactivated
! WARNING!
important of the alarms that can occur on the machine.
1.4.6.5. EMERGENCY PHASE
The emergency phase occurs in the sterilizer when the following events occur:
A malfunction during the sterilization process;

A restart of the machine after an interruption caused by a blackout;
An activation of the manual CYCLE STOP command.
Activation of the emergency phase closes all the valves and stops all the motors, setting the autoclave in
standby mode.
This suspended state ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.
! WARNING!
Activation of the STOP key in the Emergency phase allows to move on to the atmospheric
pressure balancing and cycle end phases. Before moving on to the atmospheric pressure
balancing phase, check that the pressure and temperature conditions allow the maneuver
without causing damage to the load. In particular, if the load is constituted by liquids, it must
be allowed to cool before pressing the STOP key.
1.4.6.6. END OF PROCESS
Once the program has reached the last defined phase (CYCLE END), the acoustic warning is activated, and
the LED arranged to the side of the STOP key starts flashing. After a preset time (phase end target) has
elapsed, or by activating the STOP key, the sterilization program ends, the display shows the MAIN MENU,
and if the printer is present and enabled, the final cycle data are printed.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 21 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4.7. PRODUCT UNLOADING
1. Open the lid as follows:
Press the 7 key on the keypad, producing the automatic discharge of the air from the
sealing gasket seat;
Check that the LED associated with the 7 key lights up;
Press the lever, which disengages the lid from the mechanical locking system;
Turn the lid horizontally until it reaches the fully open position;
Transfer the load from the chamber, removing the flexible heat probe;
Place the heat probe inside the empty sterilization chamber.
1.4.8. DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF
The sterilizer can be stopped and switched off only by turning the main switch.
Halting and power-off is achieved by returning the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, to
the O position.
NOTE
Before deactivating the machine, remember to enter the STAND-BY password (0000).
An equivalent operation is:

Press the 2 to select (PASSWORD LOGOUT), which places the system in STANDBY.
1.5. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Some functions of the sterilizer are active even when a normal sterilization cycle is not being performed.
These functions are typically dedicated to printing the parameters related to the sterilization cycle and to
changing certain general parameters, such as the date and time, or to checking that the operator panel is
functional.
Not all auxiliary functions are freely usable by the operator. The key information is provided below for each of
these functions.
1.5.1. PRINTING FUNCTION
The printer with which the machine is equipped allows to print the data of the cycle.
The enabling of data printing and the printing rate are preset in the general parameter page.
The following information is included in the print report, in the following order:
1. HEADING
FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI
DATE AND TIME of program start
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 22 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
SERIAL NUMBER of the autoclave

Space for notes
2. PROGRAM NUMBER AND LIST OF PROGRAM PARAMETERS
3. CYCLE DATA
These data correspond to the data shown on the display and are printed at a preset rate (calculated
on the phase time).
4. ALARM REPORTS:
DATE and TIME of alarm recording
STATE OF ALARM detected (ON, OFF)
ALARM NAME
5. FINAL DATA
CYCLE NUMBER (progressive cycle number)
CYCLE DURATION (total cycle time)
STERILIZATION TIME (time of exposure to correct temperatures during the sterilization
phase)
DATE AND TIME (program end time)
SIGNATURE (Space for signature of operator and supervisor)
When no cycles are running, the page shown on the display can be printed by pressing the 9 key.
1.5.2. CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME
(This option is available to the operator only at the User Supervisor level).
The operator panel is provided with an internal clock, which runs constantly and is powered by a battery that
keeps the date and time up-to-date even when no mains power is available.
It is in any case possible, if necessary, to set or change the current date and time:
From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds; the display shows the panel
function menu;
Select the TIM parameter by using the R and L keys;
Press ENTER to confirm the selection; the monitor shows the fields that contain the system date
and time;
Enter the chosen numeric value in the highlighted field by using the keypad;
Press ENTER to move to the next field and then repeat the above operation if necessary;
1.5.3. CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL
The machine is equipped with a software tool that allows to perform an online check of the functionality of
the Operator Panel.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 23 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
This check allows to verify the operation of the battery of the operator panel, of the LEDs, the status of the
communication of the panel with the PLC and with the printer (if installed); this check also allows to adjust
the brightness of the display.
To check the operator panel:
From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds: the panel function menu is shown on
the display;
Operate the R and L keys until the SYS function is highlighted;
Press ENTER to confirm the option selected on the monitor: the autodiagnosis page of the panel is
displayed;
Operate the U and D to select the various options;
Select the DISPLAY line; to change the brightness of the display, press the R and L keys;
After highlighting the line related to the battery, check the operating status of the battery;
After highlighting the PLC line, check the status of the connection of the panel to the PLC by
means of the corresponding message;
After highlighting the PRINTER line, check the status of the connection of the printer to the panel
by means of the corresponding message;
1.5.4. AUTODIAGNOSIS
(This option is available to the operator only in display mode).

The process controller is provided with a diagnostic tool, termed AUTODIAGNOSIS, which allows to check:
The values of the parameters related to the digital input/output channels;
The analog inputs of the system.
The autodiagnosis function can be accessed by means of the main menu:
press the 3 key to enter (AUTODIAGNOSIS) and then;

press the 1 key to select (DIGITAL INPUTS);
press the 2 key to select (DIGITAL OUTPUTS);
press the 3 key to select (ANALOG INPUTS);
press the 4 key to select (TEMPERATURE PROBE CALIBRATION);
press the 5 key to select (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION).
1.5.5. ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT
The alarm history can be accessed by means of the main menu:
press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then;

press the 2 key to select the (ALARM MANAGEMENT) menu, then;
press the 1 key to select (DISPLAY LIST);
press the 2 key to select (PRINT LIST);
press the 3 key to select (DELETE LIST) function not allowed to the operator.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 24 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
As an alternative, it is possible to access the alarm history by activating the EVT function from the panel
function menu. This allows to display a specific page in which a keypad command can display in each
instance the other previously occurred alarms, starting from the last detected alarm.
The page lists, for each alarm that has occurred:
The progressive number;
The STATUS transition type that has been affected by the detected condition:
* ON = alarm onset;
* OFF = deactivation;
* ACK = acknowledgment.
The description of the alarm condition that has occurred;
The date and time when the alarm occurred.
To display the alarm list page on the monitor, proceed as follows:
Access the main menu;

Press ENTER (for at least two seconds): the panel function menu is displayed;
Select the EVT function by acting on the R and L keys;
Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected option. This displays the most recent alarm;
Operate the U key to display the other logged alarms.
NOTE
By pressing the 9 key, all the detected alarms are printed, starting from the first displayed
alarm up to the most recent alarms. Access to the alarm list page is not allowed if no alarms
have been logged in the memory area.
NOTE
The maximum number of alarms that can be logged in the history is 256; if this limit is
exceeded, the excess messages replace the oldest ones.
1.5.6. AUTOCLAVE DATA
By pressing the 4 key from the Main Menu and then the 3 key from the Special Functions menu, the
AUTOCLAVE DATA option is selected, giving access to the page that lists the general data of the sterilizer:
Table 1.5.6. Autoclave data
Serial number Can be entered only by Fedegari personnel
Panel software version Fixed
PLC software version Fixed
Number of cycles performed by the machine Automatic, not modifiable
Enabling/disabling of optional kit KG41 Can be performed only by Fedegari personnel
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 25 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.5.7. INITIALIZATION
It is possible to access the menu that allows to transfer the parameters to the Process Controller by means
of the main menu (this option is not available to the operator):
press the 4 key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) and then;

press the 4 to enter (INITIALIZATION);
a confirmation is requested in order to proceed with the data transfer by means of the ENTER key, then;
the flashing message INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS is displayed at the end;
the system resumes displaying the main menu.
NOTE
The INITIALIZATION operation must be performed only during installation. The unintentional
activation of this function does not compromise the functionality of the system.
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 26 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
2. ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1. ALARMS
The sterilizer reports certain alarms, which are displayed with a brief description and are printed if the printer
is operating correctly and the corresponding function is activated.
The occurrence of an alarm is reported visually and also by activating an acoustic alarm.
The alarms are defined as:
System alarms, if they affect safety instruments or general safety conditions

Phase alarms, if they are related to the execution of specific phases
Cycle alarms, if they can occur only during a cycle in progress and are not linked to specific phases
Higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process,
interrupt the cycle, with immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a
safe and suspended state.
Pressing the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase and to
the consequent cycle end.
All the alarms identify operating anomalies that can be solved spontaneously or require technical
intervention.
The machine described in this manual can activate the alarms listed in the following Table.
NOTE
The abbreviations TE and TP that occur in the alarm messages refer to the heat probe
and to the pressure transducer, respectively.
NOTE
Some alarms require operator acknowledgment (flashing ACK message).

Press the ENTER key for at least 2 seconds to eliminate the alarm acknowledgment
message.
The meaning of the columns of the Table is as follows:
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 27 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
- No. : alarm number;

- ALARM : alarm message;
- CAUSE : description of the abnormal condition detected by the controller;
- TYPE : type of alarm;
- DELAY : alarm activation delay;
- RESULT : action produced by the alarm on the sterilizer;
- BUZ : buzzer;
- PRINT ON : printout (alarm onset);
- PRINT OFF : printout (alarm deactivation);
- ACK : request to acknowledge the alarm.
Table 2.1 List of alarms

PRN PRN
No. ALARM CAUSE TYPE DELAY RESULT BUZ ACK
ON OFF

phase, the temperature in Phase
1 STERIL T EXCESS the chamber exceeds the Display X X X
maximum sterilization
temperature (R6).

Display
phase, the temperature in
and
2 STERIL T LACK the chamber drops below Phase X X X
steril.
the minimum sterilization
time held
temperature (R4).

Display
OVER- detects in the chamber a
3 Cycle and X X X
TEMPERATURE ! temperature above the
EMERG
allowed limit (138C).
Display
OVERPRESSURE Fixed threshold of 4 bar
4 Cycle and X X X
! abs is exceeded
EMERG

TE Display
temperature that exceeds
5 UNSERVICEABLE System 5 and X X X
the measurement range of
! EMERG
the heat probe or is

TP Display
pressure that exceeds the
6 UNSERVICEABLE System 5 and X X X
measurement range of the
! EMERG
pressure transducer or is
ID no. 84505 Rev. 2 28 / 33 Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MANUAL
PRN PRN
ON OFF
The controller receives

from the minimum-level
sensor the signal that
indicates lack of water in
STEAM WATER
7 the steam generator. System 60 Display X X X
LACK
Note: this alarm is enabled
only if the steam generator
is active (parameter G10
=1)
While a cycle is in
progress, the process
controller detects Display
DOOR OPEN IN
8 imperfect closure of the lid Cycle 5 and X X X
CYCLE !
(lack of signal from EMERG
inflated-gasket pressure
switch).

detects an operating
Display
DOOR SYSTEM anomaly on the inputs
9 System 5 and X X X
ALARM (limit switches and
EMERG
pressure switches of the
door system).
Displayed and printed Display

PHASE-STEP during the execution of a and
10 Cycle X X
UTILIZED cycle after activating the Phase
PHASE STEP function. end
Displayed and printed

during the execution of a Display
MANUAL CYCLE-
11 cycle after the activation of Cycle and X X
STOP
the CYCLE STOP EMERG
function.
Display
Displayed and printed,
BLACKOUT and
12 when a cycle is restarted, Cycle X X
DETECTED B.O.
following a blackout.
EMERG.
The printer is not available

13 PRINTER ERROR even though option K81=1 System 10 Display X X
and G11=1.
Activation if battery is
drained or missing.
PANEL BATTERY
14 This alarm is activated System Display X X
LOW !
before the battery is
completely drained.
The controller does not

VACUUM PUMP receive the return signal
15 System Display X X X
ALARM ! from the pump (digital
input TMPV)
29 / 33
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PRN PRN
ON OFF

OVER- temperature that is higher
TEMPERATURE than 100C and it
16 System Display X X
FOR VACUUM deactivates the vacuum
PUMP ! pump until the
temperature returns below
this threshold (TE<100C).
! WARNING!
importance of the alarms that can occur on the machine.
2.2. TROUBLESHOOTING
This subsection provides information on finding and identifying the faults that can occur in the sterilizer
(occurrence of alarms, generation of abnormal vibration and noise).
! WARNING!
Every intervention on the machine, including access to electrically live parts and to the primary
supply lines, must be performed by specialized personnel of the manufacturer FEDEGARI or by
personnel authorized by FEDEGARI.
2.2.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The following table lists the most frequent symptoms of malfunction that can occur during the use of the
sterilizer. The possible causes and any corrective actions are given for each symptom.
Table 2.2.1 - Troubleshooting
Ref. No.
ALARM
a) Malfunction of generator a) Identify the fault.

pressure switch.
During the sterilization phase, b) Malfunction of heat probe b) Identify the faulty element
the temperature inside the or pressure transducer. and replace it.
chamber exceeds the
1 sterilization temperature plus c) The heat probe or the c) Calibrate the system on the
the sterilization tolerance. The pressure sensor are not signal that arrives from the
display shows the alarm calibrated appropriately. heat probe or from the
message STERIL T EXCESS. d) The sensor signal pressure transducer.
30 / 33
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Ref. No.
ALARM
a) Incorrect operation of a) Identify the malfunction of

steam generator the steam generator.
During the sterilization phase, b) Failure of heat probe or b) Identify the faulty element
the temperature inside the pressure transducer. and replace it.
chamber drops below the
2 sterilization temperature. c) The heat probe or the c) Calibrate the system on the
pressure sensor are not signal that arrives from the
The display shows the alarm calibrated appropriately. heat probe or from the
message STERIL. T LACK. transducer.
a) Malfunction of electric a) Repair or replace the
valve for loading steam into electric valve.
the chamber.
allowed limit.
The display shows the alarm b) Failure to close of the b) Repair or replace the feed
3 message EXCESS CHAMBER valve for feeding saturated valve.
T. steam to the chamber.
The cycle in progress is
interrupted and immediate
transition to the emergency
phase occurs.
a) Malfunction of the heat a) Identify the faulty
probe TE or of the module component by using the
for converting the signal autodiagnosis functions,
measurement range of the heat
detected by the probe. repair it, or replace it.
probe.
5 The display shows the alarm

message TE
UNSERVICEABLE .
emergency phase occurs
a) Malfunction of the a) Identify the faulty
inside the chamber, a pressure
pressure transducer or of component by using the
that exceeds the measurement
the module for converting autodiagnosis functions,
range of the pressure
the signal detected by the repair it, or replace it.
transducer.
transducer.
6 The display shows the alarm
message TP
UNSERVICEABLE
31 / 33
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Ref. No.
ALARM
a) The water supply is a) Restore the demineralized

unavailable. water supply.
One probably cause can
be, in addition to b) Repair or replace the pump.
unavailability of the water
supply, the presence of air c) Check the line for supplying
bubbles in the pump intake water to the independent
duct. If so, remove steam generator.
pressure from the
The controller receives from generator by opening the d) Once the faulty component
the level sensor the signal that manual valve (remember to has been found, repair it or
indicates lack of water in the close it again after draining replace it. Replace the level
7 independent steam generator. is complete). Once this sensor.
operation is complete, the
The alarm message STEAM supply of deionized water
WATER LACK is displayed. can be restored.
b) The water pump that

supplies the independent
steam generator is faulty.
c) The supply valves are dirty

or faulty.
d) The level sensor is faulty.
While a cycle is in progress, a) Malfunction of the a) Replace the pressure

the process controller detects pressure switch that switch
imperfect closure of the lid: senses high pressure in
the lid gasket.
8 message DOOR OPEN IN b) Lack of compressed air in b) Check the compressed air
CYCLE. lid gasket. supply circuit. Once the
defective component has
The cycle is interrupted and been found, repair it or
immediate transition to the replace it.
a) The printer has been a) Disable the printer.

enabled (KG81=1, G11=1)
but is not present on the
The display shows the
13 sterilizer. b) Check the connections of
message PRINTER ERROR.
the printer to the controller
b) The printer is not powered. and to the electrical
system.
32 / 33
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Ref. No.
ALARM
a) Internal short circuit. a) Using the electrical

diagram, find and eliminate
the fault.
b) The electrical cabinet is b) Close the electrical cabinet

The sterilizer cannot be started by operating its key.
open.
- because the main switch trips
repeatedly.
c) Remove the reason why the
resistors were running dry
c) The thermostat that or with an insufficient water
protects the resistors of level.
the generator has tripped.
a) Fault in the regulating a) Replace the pressure

pressure switch. switch.
After starting the cycle, the
controller does not receive the b) Malfunction of the heating
-
clearance signal indicating that system of the independent b) Check the efficiency of the
the generator is ready. generator. electrical resistors and of
the electric circuits that
supply power to them.
33 / 33
SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE
ID no. 84506 Rev. 3 1/7 February 2006

1. ORDINARY MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................3

1.1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES................................................................................. 4
1.1.1. VISUAL INSPECTION................................................................................................................. 4
1.1.1.1. PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 4
1.1.1.2. LIST OF CHECKS ................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2. CLEANING AND CHECKING ..................................................................................................... 6
1.1.2.1. PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 6
1.1.2.2. PARTS TO BE CLEANED AND CHECKED ........................................................................... 7

1. ORDINARY MAINTENANCE
The maintenance operations described in this chapter have been defined after careful examination of the
average operating conditions of the machine. If substantially different requirements occur, you should
promptly contact the manufacturer.
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance procedures applicable to the machine; as regards the
individual components of the machine, please refer to the specific maintenance data sheets.
In preparing an adequate maintenance schedule for the sterilizer, you should also consider that any periods
of inactivity of the machine must be considered according to its duration.
Short periods of inactivity

There are no particular issues regarding periods of inactivity of less than two months.
Long periods of inactivity

For periods of over two months, in order to prevent sticking or early deterioration of the gaskets, treat them
with silicone oil. Following particularly extended machine downtimes, it may be necessary to replace the
gaskets and the seals.
; CAUTION
Correct and accurate maintenance allows to prevent most of the anomalies and preserve over
time the performance of the machine in addition to facilitating its longer durability.
! WARNING!
Before performing any maintenance operation on the sterilizer, unless otherwise specified,
ALWAYS shut it down, disengaging the main switch and disconnecting the machine from the
mains electric power supply and from any other power sources.
! WARNING!
ALWAYS perform the periodic maintenance activities listed in this manual. Accordingly,
periodically perform higher-level maintenance and any associated overhaul specified by
FEDEGARI.
In any case, never exceed 12 months or 400 cycles without performing a general check of the
machine.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any faults or damage arising from partial or
full non-compliance with these periods and methods.
NOTE
Overloads of an electric motor are almost always caused by mechanical anomalies. These
anomalies usually become apparent by producing abnormal vibration and noise, which should
always be given appropriate attention from their first occurrence. When in doubt, promptly
contact the Technical Support Service of FEDEGARI.

1.1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
This subsection lists the procedural steps recommended for correctly performing ordinary preventive
maintenance to be performed on the machine. These procedures are organized by subject, and they list, in
addition to any warnings, the frequency and the tools, materials and instruments to be used during
maintenance.
The procedures are organized according to the following subjects:
Visual inspection
Cleaning and checking
! WARNING!
Perform maintenance activities only while wearing adequate clothing, suitable for the type of
maintenance to be performed and at the same time capable of protecting the operator from the
danger of bruising, abrasions, and contact burns, even with jets of fluids at high temperature.
! WARNING!
Before performing any maintenance on the sterilizer, unless otherwise specified, ALWAYS stop
the machine, disengaging the mains switch and disconnecting the machine from the mains
power supply.
! WARNING!
Do not perform maintenance operations unless you are certain of being able to operate in an
environment that is not contaminated by chemical, bacterial, or microbiological agents, i.e.,
ONLY WHEN the previous sterilization cycle performed on the sterilizer has ended successfully
and the materials that constitute the load have been regularly sterilized without any leakage
(breakage or opening of bottles, bags, containers or others). Maintenance activity on the
sterilizer in the presence of chemical, bacterial or microbiological agents MUST BE authorized
expressly by the departments in charge of the company that owns the sterilizer, and must be
performed by using suitable protective equipment in accordance with the safety standards
applicable in the country of use.
! WARNING!
Some parts of the machine inside the technical area are constituted by components and
surfaces where high temperatures accumulate during operation. The operator MUST AVOID
strictly any attempt to access these parts without first putting on suitable protective clothing.
1.1.1. VISUAL INSPECTION
Once a week, visually check the integrity of the system and of its main components as described in the
following subsections.
1.1.1.1. PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
Before performing visual inspection of the machine, check that:
According to the work reports, the last sterilization cycle ended successfully;

The lid of the machine is open

When the lid is closed, the pressure in the chamber is equal to the atmospheric pressure and the
temperature is, with a 10% tolerance, equal to the ambient temperature;
The machine is switched off and the process controller is deactivated; otherwise, deactivate the
machine and take the safety steps for isolating the machine from the electric power source
1.1.1.2. LIST OF CHECKS
Off-line check
Accessing the technical area if necessary, check once every month the physical integrity of the components
and in particular:
1. Check that the hydraulic ducts and the pneumatic lines are intact and do not have cracks or
deformations, and that there is no evident dripping, leakage of liquid, or jets of fluids under pressure.
Check moreover that all the plastic ducts do not touch the metallic parts because these one reach,
during the working, high temperatures;
2. Check the physical integrity of the electrical lines that carry signals, power supply and commands;
they must not have portions that are frayed or without insulation, or loose portions with excessively
tight radii of curvature;
3. Inspect the surfaces of the internal sterilization chamber. They must be perfectly smooth and
polished and must show no dents, abrasions or scuffing of any kind;
4. Inspect the outer surfaces of the panels and of the console. They must be intact in terms of shape
and surface finish;
5. Check the connections to the primary supply lines and all the connectors of the machine; they must
be fixed firmly to the pipes, must have no cracks or deformations, and there must be no evident
dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluids under pressure, particularly on the flow control valves of
the primary lines provided by the user;
6. Check the physical integrity of all the components of the system (electric valves, filters and sensors);
in particular, the external containers must be intact, the identification plates must be readable, the
cable guides and hermetic connectors must not have mechanical anomalies and/or losses of
insulation;
7. Check the integrity of the heat probes; in particular, inspect the head of the sensor for any scale,
deformation or breakage. Moreover, the sheath that lines the signal conductor must be intact upon
flexing, without speckling with consequent losses of insulation;
8. Check the physical integrity of the autonomous generator and of other auxiliary systems, if provided;
9. By acting repeatedly on the emergency stop device (red mushroom-shaped button), check that the
actuation of this device entails normal mechanical reactions on the part of the device and does not
generate abnormal noise. The device must also be intact in its shape and coloring;
10. Check the physical integrity of the control devices: keypad, display, and vacuum gauges. The
surfaces must be intact, without cracks, speckling, abrasions or breakages; in particular, the screen
printing on the keys and the control buttons must be clearly legible and be unchanged in its color;
11. Check that all the warning and danger plates have been placed correctly and coupled to the
supporting surface and that they are intact and have unchanged colors.
On-line check
During a process cycle and during the sterilization phase, perform the following check once every month,
accessing the technical area if necessary:

! WARNING!
This check performed while the machine is active must be performed ONLY VISUALLY and with
suitable personal protection means. Absolutely avoid making physical contact with any part of
the machine.
1. Check that no dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluids under pressure is evident on the hydraulic
lines;
2. Check that there is no hissing or abnormal conditions that reveal leaks in the pneumatic circuits of
the machine;
3. Check the connections to the primary supply lines and all the connectors of the system; there must
be no evident dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluid under pressure, particularly on the flow
control valves of the primary lines provided by the user;
4. Check that the noise level of operating components such as the water pump and the electric
compressor is normal and continuous without changes in intensity and/or tone.
1.1.2. CLEANING AND CHECKING
Normal operations for cleaning the sterilizer must be performed in accordance to what has been described in
this subsection. Specific products must be used for each part to be treated. Use of unsuitable substances or
tools may cause severe damage to the machine and to its components.
; CAUTION
In Fedegari sterilizers, the parts in contact with the process fluids are made of austenitic
stainless steel, which if maintained correctly has excellent corrosion resistance characteristics.
Maintenance cleaning of the internal surfaces should be performed regularly.
Unless otherwise specified, never use abrasive cloths or tools. Always use gentle natural or
synthetic sponges and lint-free cloths.
! WARNING!
Austenitic stainless steel surfaces, when in contact with chlorine or with its compounds, may
lose their resistance to corrosion and be damaged irreversibly. When using and cleaning the
sterilizer, absolutely avoid the use of solutions and detergents that contain chlorine or
chlorides.
1.1.2.1. PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
Before cleaning the machine, check that:
According to the work reports, the last sterilization cycle ended successfully;
The lid of the machine is open
When the lid is closed, the pressure in the chamber is equal to the atmospheric pressure and the
temperature is, with a 10% tolerance, equal to the ambient temperature;
The machine is switched off and the process controller is deactivated; otherwise, deactivate the
machine and take the safety steps for isolating the machine from the electric power source

1.1.2.2. PARTS TO BE CLEANED AND CHECKED
The parts of the sterilizer that require periodic checking and cleaning in order to ensure their correct
operation and preserve the best levels of reliability and efficiency are:
Lid and external cabinet
Usually once every month, the lid and the external cabinet should be cleaned with a moist cloth.
Product transport baskets
Usually once a week, the containers must be cleaned by washing and rinsing.
1. Wash with hot water and normally commercially available non-abrasive, non-acid detergents;
2. Rinse with water abundantly and thoroughly.
Checking the tightness of the compressed air system
This check is to be performed monthly:
1. Close the lid of the sterilizer;

2. Disconnect the electric power supply of the machine by means of the main circuit breaker;
3. Check on the dedicated pressure gauge that the amount of pressure loss in the system after 1.5
hours of machine downtime is less than 1.5/bar.
Other parts
Moreover, for each of the parts listed above, it is recommended to perform the cleaning and maintenance
procedures given in the specific maintenance data sheets
Sterilization chamber
Filter in chamber
Safety valves
Heat probe
Operator interface devices
Printer
Manual valve.

PIANO MANUTENZIONI PMP
ID no. 86731
MAINTENANCE PLAN Rev. 1 - Page 1/2
MODELLO
MODEL
FVG
FREQUENZA
GRUPPO SOTTOGRUPPO OPERAZIONI FREQUENCY SMC
ASSEMBLY SUB-ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS
D W M Q Y WR
Verifica efficienza:
X
Blocco coperchio Efficiency checking: 0074
Cover block Sostituzione: rev.1
X
Replacement:
Registrazione coperchio:
X
Cover checking:
Cerniera coperchio 0075
Sostituzione perno di
Cover hinge rev.1
rotazione: X
Replacement of the rotation pin:
Verifica efficienza di intervento:
Dispositivo di sicurezza X
Checking check-up of the device:
apertura porta 0076
Sagety device door Revisione completa rev.1
dispositivo: X
opening
Complete check-up of the device:
Pulizia filtro:
X
Filtro in camera Filter cleaning: 0077
Filter in chamber Sostituzione O-ring: rev.1
X
O-ring replacement:
Verifica efficienza di sfogo:
X
Checking correct vent:
Verifica taratura e capacit di
Valvole di sicurezza sfogo: 0078
Safetu relief valves X rev.1
Checking calibration and venting
capacity:
Sostituzione:
X
Replacement:
Controllo:
X
Valvola manuale Checking:
0079
Manual valve Sostituzione: rev.1
X
Replacement:
Manutenzione e controllo:
X
Termoresistenza Cleaning and checking: 0080
Thermal probe Sostituzione: rev.1
X
Replacement:
Controllo stampante:
X
Printer checking:
Stampante Sostituzione rotolo carta: 0081
Printe X
Coil paper replacement: rev.1
Sostituzione stampante:
X
Printer replacement
FREQUENZA - FREQUENCY
D = Giornaliera W = Settimanale M = Mensile Q = Trimestrale Y = Annuale WR = Quando Richiesto
Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly Yearly When required
PIANO MANUTENZIONI PMP
ID no. 86731
MAINTENANCE PLAN Rev. 1 - Page 2/2
FREQUENZA
GRUPPO SOTTOGRUPPO OPERAZIONI FREQUENCY SMC
ASSEMBLY SUB-ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS
D W M Q Y WR
Valvole di ritegno
Sostituzione piattello, O-ring,
singole e inserite in
Valvola. anello di centraggio e molla. 0059
gruppi distributori. x
Valve. Shutter, O-ring, centering ring and rev.1
Check valves stand-alone
spring replacement.
and fitted on manifolds.
Controllo:
X
Guarnizione coperchio Checking: 0083
Cover gasket Sostituzione: rev.1
X
Replacement:
Controllo generale:
X
General checking:
Pulizia camera generatore di
vapore:
X
Steam generator chamber
cleaning:
Controllo e pulizia termostato:
Generatore di vapore 0084
Thermostat checking and X
Steam generator rev.1
cleaning:
Sostituzione termostati:
X
Thermostat replacement:
Controllo, pulizia e sostituzione
resistenza elettrica:
X
Heating element check and
replacement:
FREQUENZA - FREQUENCY
D = Giornaliera W = Settimanale M = Mensile Q = Trimestrale Y = Annuale WR = Quando Richiesto
Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly Yearly When required
SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE SMC0074
ID no. 86676
MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET Rev. 1 - Page 1/3
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: BLOCCO COPERCHIO
FVG: COVER BLOCK
CODICE RIFERIMENTO COSTRUTTORE

REFERENCE CODE MANUFACTURER
GF170172 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Blocco di sicurezza per apertura coperchio
Safety block for cover opening
MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA FREQUENZA QUALIFICA MANUTENTORE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FREQUENCY OPERATORS QUALIFICATION
Verifica efficienza: Mensile Operazioni effettuabili solamente

Efficiency checking: Monthly da personale qualificato.
Sostituzione: Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by skilled
Replacement: When necessary personnel only.
ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI
TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS
Chiave esagonale: Cacciaviti:
Hex wrench: Screwdrivers:
Chiave a brugola: Pinza a becco:

Allen wrench: Round nose pliers:
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento.

The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.
Assicurarsi che lalimentazione elettrica e le altre utenze siano interrotte.

Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.
Funzione Nome Data Funzione Nome Data

Function Name Date Function Name Date
Redatto da: Verificato e approvato da:
Written by ACP MMS 28/10/2004 Verified and approved by: ING FAF 28/102004
ID no. 86676
1. CONTROLLO
CHECK
Togliere i pannelli rimuovendo le viti (fig.1).

Remove panels, after taking away the screws (fig.1).
Verificare il corretto impegno del coperchio con il
dispositivo di blocco coperchio; nel caso in cui il
dispositivo di blocco non dovesse pi manifestare la sua
funzionalit sar necessario procedere alla sostituzione
della molla (1) (fig. 4).
Check the correct engagement between the cover and the block
device, if the block cover doesnt work correctly, the spring has fig. 1
to be replaced (1) (fig. 4).
Verificare la presenza di gioco della leva nel blocco
coperchio (2); se eccessivo, verificare lusura della rondella
(3) (fig. 4).
Check the movement of the lever on the cover block (2), if
excessive, verify the level of usury of the washer (3) (fig.4).
Controllare con un tester il punto di commutazione del
microinterruttore. Verificare lapertura/chiusura del contatto
sulla scheda di controllo (fig.2); per farlo, inserire le punte
del tester nei contatti 11/12 (fig.3) della scheda di controllo e
commutare manualmente il microinterruttore. In caso di
esito positivo, il tester indica una variazione di tensione; in fig. 2
caso contrario, verificare che non ci siano interruzioni del
cavo elettrico o sostituire il microinterruttore.
Check, with a tester, the correct commutation point of the
microswitch. Verify the on/off contact on the control card (fig.2),
inserting the tester points in the position 11/12 of the control card
(fig.3), and push the microswitch; if the process is correct the
tester shows a tension variation, otherwise check the electric
cable or use a new microswitch.
2. SOSTITUZIONI
REPLACEMENT
Nel caso di eccessivo gioco della leva (2) del chiavistello,

sostituire la rondella (3); per far questo, svitare la vite (4),
sostituire la rondella (3) e alla fine rimontare il tutto (fig.4).
If there is excessive movement from the lever on cover block (2),
replace the washer (3) by removing the screw (4), replacing the
washer (3) and reassembling the mechanism (fig. 4).
Si effettua la sostituzione della molla (1) quando questa ha fig. 3
perso lelasticit (fig.4).
Replace the spring (1) when it loses its elasticity (fig. 4).
Per rimuovere la molla guasta necessario togliere gli
occhielli dagli appositi ganci (5) con una pinza a becco
(fig.4).
To remove the bad spring, it is necessary to remove the eyes
from its hooks (5) using one nose pliers (fig. 4).
Sostituire infine con la molla nuova infilando gli occhielli
nei ganci (5), ancora con lausilio di una pinza a becco
(fig.4).
Replace with a new spring and put its eyes in the hooks (5)
using again one nose pliers (fig. 4).
ID no. 86676
Verificare il corretto funzionamento della leva (2) del blocco coperchio (fig.4).
Check the correct operation of the lever (2) of the block cover (fig. 4).
Sostituzione microinterruttore
Microswitch replacement
Togliere le viti (6) (fig. 4).
Remove the screws (6) (fig.4).
Scollegare il cavo elettrico (7) dalla scheda di controllo (fig. 4).
Disconnect the electric cable (7) from the control card (fig.4).
Rimuovere il microinterruttore (8) (fig. 4).
Remove the microswitch (8) (fig.4).
Sostituire il nuovo interruttore, avvitando le viti (6) e collegando il filo elettrico (7) alla
scheda di controllo (fig. 4).
Replace the new microswitch tightening the screws (6) and connecting the electric cable (7) to the
control card (fig. 4).
Controllare il corretto funzionamento del nuovo microinterruttore, come sopra indicato.
Check the correct work of the new microswitch, as above-mentioned.
Sostituzione gruppo completo

Device replacement
Togliere le viti (6/9) (fig.4).

Remove the screws (6/9) (fig. 4).
Togliere il gruppo.
Remove the device.
Sostituire il nuovo gruppo fissandolo con le viti (9). Fissare il microinterruttore (fig. 8) con
le viti (6) (fig.4).
Replace the new device with the screws (9) and fix the microswitch (fig. 8) with the screws (6) (fig.
4).
Controllare il corretto funzionamento di tutto il sistema di chiusura.
Check the correct work of the block cover.
4 3
5
1
9
2
7 9
6
fig. 4
ID no. 86677
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: CERNIERA PER COPERCHIO
FVG: COVER HINGE

GP750042 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.P.A.
Sistema per la chiusura dello sterilizzatore

Sterilizer closure system

Registrazione coperchio Mensile Operazioni effettuabili solamente da

Cover checking Monthly personale qualificato.
Sostituzione perno di rotazione Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by skilled
Replacement of the rotation pin When necessary personnel only.
Chiave esagonale: Chiave a brugola:

Hex wrench: Allen wrench:

Written by ACP MMS 28/10/2004 Verified and approved by: ING FAF 28/10/2004
ID no. 86677
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS

The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off

1. REGISTRAZIONE COPERCHIO
COVER CHECKING
Aprire lo sterilizzatore e svitare le 4 viti che bloccano il carter del coperchio (figg. 1 e 2).
Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws locking the cover casing (figg. 1 and 2).
fig. 2
fig. 1
Socchiudere il coperchio.
Half-close the cover.
Controllare che lasse del perno di rotazione sia allineato correttamente con lasse dello
sterilizzatore. Lallineamento corretto se lo spazio di luce compreso fra il coperchio e il
corpo dello sterilizzatore uguale sia alla sinistra che alla destra della cerniera di rotazione
(Xs~Xd) (fig. 3). Se non corretto, sar necessario allentare le quattro viti che fissano la guida
perno per rotazione cerniera al corpo dello sterilizzatore e, avvitando o svitando le due viti di
regolazione, riportare nella corretta posizione verticale lasse del perno di rotazione (fig. 4).
Riavvitare i dadi di fissaggio della guida al corpo dello sterilizzatore.
Check that the axis of the rotation pin is exactly lined with the sterilizer axis. The alignment is right if
the light-space between the cover and the sterilizers body is the same on the left and the right side
of the rotation hinge (Xs~Xd) (fig. 3). If it is not correct, it will be necessary to loosen the screws
jamming the pin guide for the hinge rotation to the sterilizers body; screwing and unscrewing the two
regulation screws, bring back again the rotation pin axis in the right position (fig. 4). Rescrew the
fixing nuts to the sterilizers body.
Allentare i due dadi che bloccano il coperchio.
Loosen the two nuts locking the cover.
Allineare il bordo del coperchio con quello della camera dello sterilizzatore avvitando ed
allentando opportunamente i 4 grani (A,B,C,D) (fig. 5).
Line up the covers rim with that of the sterilizers chamber screwing and loosening the four screws
(A, B, C, D) (fig. 5).
ID no. 86677
Xd
Xs
A B
fig. 3
C D
fig. 4 fig. 5
- Se si avvitano i grani A e B il coperchio ruota in senso orario rispetto al piano della

cerniera; se la rotazione non sufficiente allentare i grani C e D (fig. 6).
- Putting in A and B screws, the cover rotates in clockwise direction as to the hinge level; if the
rotation is not sufficient, loosen the screws C and D (fig. 6).
- Se si avvitano i grani C e D il coperchio ruota in senso antiorario rispetto al piano della
cerniera; se la rotazione non sufficiente allentare i grani A e B (fig. 7).
- Putting in C and D screws the cover rotates in anticlockwise direction as to the hinge level; if
the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the screws A and B.
- Se si avvitano i grani A e C il coperchio ruota in senso antiorario rispetto al piano
ortogonale alla cerniera; se la rotazione non sufficiente allentare i grani B e D (fig. 8).
- Putting in A and C screws the cover rotates in anticlockwise direction as to the hinge orthogonal
level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the B and D screws (fig. 8).
- Se si avvitano i grani B e D il coperchio ruota in senso orario rispetto al piano
ortogonale alla cerniera; se la rotazione non sufficiente allentare i grani A e C (fig. 9).
- Putting in B and D screws, the cover rotates in clockwise direction as to the hinge orthogonal
level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the A and C screws (fig. 9).
A C
B D
fig. 6 fig. 7
C A
DB
fig. 8 fig. 9
ID no. 86677
Riavvitare i due dadi di serraggio del coperchio dello sterilizzatore. Come verifica aprire 2-3
volte il coperchio dello sterilizzatore: questo deve poter ruotare senza strisciare contro il
bordo superiore del corpo dello sterilizzatore.
Rescrew the two tightening nuts of the sterilizers cover. To check, open 2/3 times the sterilizers
cover: it has to be able to rotate without scratching the upper edge of the sterilizers body.
2. SOSTITUZIONE PERNO DI ROTAZIONE

ROTATION PIN REPLACEMENT
Togliere il pannello laterale destro rimuovendo le 4 viti di bloccaggio (fig. 10).
Remove the lateral panel after taking away the four locking screws (fig. 10).
Aprire lo sterilizzatore e svitare le 4 viti che bloccano il carter del coperchio (fig. 11).
Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws locking the cover casing (fig. 11).
fig. 11
fig. 10
Togliere il carter.
Remove the casing.
Svitare il dado e il contro dado che bloccano il perno di rotazione del coperchio alla guida,
rimuovendo anche le molle a tazza e la bussola di centraggio inferiori (fig. 12).
Unscrew the nuts locking the covers rotation pin to the guide, removing the lower Belleville spring
and the collet (fig 12).
Sfilare il perno di rotazione tirando verso lalto il coperchio, rimuovendo anche le molle a
tazza e la bussola di centraggio superiori (fig .13).
Unthread the rotation pin pulling the cover upwards, removing the upper Belleville spring and the
collet (fig 13).
Per sostituire il perno di rotazione del coperchio, svitare il grano che lo blocca al coperchio,
sfilarlo dalla sua sede, sostituirloe fissarlo con il grano (fig.14). Reinstallare il sistema sullo
sterilizzatore procedendo nel senso inverso e, se occorre, sostituire le molle a tazza e le
bussole.
To replace the cover rotation pin, unscrew the screw, unthread the pin from its seat, replace and fix it
with a screw (fig.14). Reinstall in the reverse order the system on the sterilizer and if necessary
replace the Belleville springs and the collets.
Per estrarre la guida perno per rotazione cerniera, svitare le 4 viti che lo fissano al corpo dello
sterilizzatore e togliere la piattina di blocco svitando le due viti di serraggio (fig.15).
To pull out the pin guide for the hinge rotation, unscrew the four screws fixing it to the sterilizers
body and remove the block wire strip unscrewing the two tightening screws (fig.15).
ID no. 86677
Allentare le viti di allineamento verticale del perno di rotazione del coperchio (fig.16).
Loosen the vertical alignment screws of the cover rotation pin (fig.16).
Reinstallare il sistema sullo sterilizzatore procedendo nel senso inverso e, se occorre,
sostituire le molle a tazza o le bussole.
Reinstall in the reverse order the system on the sterilizer and if necessary replace the Belleville
springs or the collets.
Nelleffettuare queste operazioni necessario curare lallineamento del coperchio come
spiegato al punto 1.
During these actions, it is necessary to supervise the covers alignment as explained at point 1
fig. 13
fig. 12
fig. 14 fig. 15 fig. 16

ID no. 86678
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: DISPOSITIVI DI SICUREZZA APERTURA PORTA
FVG: SAFETY DEVICE DOOR OPENING
CODICE RIFERIMENTO: COSTRUTTORE:

REFERENCE CODE: MANUFACTURER:
FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
GP400198
MICROPRECISION
Dispositivo di sicurezza che impedisce lapertura della porta con pressione in camera.
Safety device that prevents the door opening with the pressure in chamber.
Utilizza una membrana in silicone con elevata resistenza alla temperatura e con grande sensibilit alla
deformazione se soggetta a carichi modesti.
The system uses a silicone membrane which is highly temperature-resistant and highly sensitive to deformation
if subjected to small load.

Verifica efficienza dintervento: Mensile Operazioni effettuabili solamente da

Checking the efficiency of the intervention: Monthly personale qualificato.
Revisione completa dispositivo: Trimestrale
Operations to be carried out by skilled
Complete check-up of the device: Quarterly
personnel only.


ID no. 86678
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
1. DESCRIZIONE FUNZIONAMENTO
OPERATING DESCRIPTION
Il dispositivo installato con asse verticale sul corpo dellapparecchio, permette linizio della
manovra di apertura della porta solo se la differenza tra la pressione allinterno della camera e
la pressione atmosferica inferiore a 0.05 bar.
Installed in vertical axis, this device permits the opening manoeuvre only if the difference between the
pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure does not exceed 0.05 bar.
Se la differenza tra la pressione allinterno della camera e la pressione atmosferica superiore
a 0.05 bar, il pistone si porta in vicinanza del microinterruttore, che attivato, interrompe
lalimentazione elettrica del sistema di apertura della o delle porte.
If the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure exceeds
0.05 bar, the piston moves closer to the micro switch. If activated, this microswitch interrupts the
electrical power supply of the door opening system.
Per effetto della forza di gravit il pistone discende quando la differenza tra la pressione
allinterno della camera e la pressione atmosferica inferiore a 0.05 bar; allontanandosi dal
microinterruttore, il pistone provoca il disinserimento, permettendo il ritorno
dellalimentazione elettrica al sistema di apertura della porta.
By gravity, the piston lowers when the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the
atmospheric pressure does not exceed 0.05 bar; by moving away from the microswitch, the piston
disengages the switch, allowing the door opening system to be supplied with electric power again.
Microinterruttor
Microswitch
Pistone
Piston
FUNZIONAMENTO DISPOSITIVI DI SICUREZZA

SAFETY DEVICE OPERATING
Pressione
Pressure
2. VERIFICA EFFICIENZA DI INTERVENTO

CHECKING EFFICIENCY OF THE INTERVENTION
Effettuare alcune manovre di chiusura e apertura della porta, e (considerando tempi di ritardo
previsti) verificare sul controllore elettronico di processo che il dispositivo sia efficiente.
Open and close the door a few times and, considering the expected delay times, check on the device
efficiency by the electronic process controller.
ID no. 86678
Premere il tasto 3 del quadro di controllo per accedere al

menu dellautodiagnosi.
Press key 3 of the control console to enter the autodiagnose AUTODIAGNOSI
1. INGRESSI DIGITALI
menu. 2. USCITE DIGITALI
Premere il tasto 1 del quadro di controllo, per visualizzare gli
ingressi digitali
Press key 1 of the control console to access the page displaying
the digital input state.
Lista ingressi Digitali

List digital inputs
0: P002 Pressostato guarnizione porta; alta pressione (porta chiusa)

Door gasket manostat, High pressure (closed door)
1: P005 Pressostato di sicurezza camera
Chamber safety manostat
2: Z001 Microinterruttore chiusura porta (fine corsa del coperchio) INGRESSI DIGITALI
Closing door microswitch (end stop of the cover) 0123456789ABCDEF (I.D.)
3: P004 Pressostato generatore di vapore 000000- - - - - - - - - - (STATE)
Steam generator manostat
4: L002 Livello minimo acqua generatore di vapore
Water minimum level of the steam generator
5: P003 Pressostato guarnizione porta; bassa pressione (porta
aperta)
Door gasket manostat; low pressure (opened door)
Verificare che in assenza di pressione in camera lingresso

digitale 1 sia allo stato 1; se allo stato 0 il pressostato
INGRESSI DIGITALI
guasto. 0123456789ABCDEF
010000- - - - - - - - - -
Verify there is no pressure inside the chamber when the digital
input 1 is to state 1, if instead it is to state 0 the manostat is
broken.
Verificare lefficienza dellintervento del dispositivo controllando che permetta linizio della
manovra di apertura alla condizione che la differenza fra pressione allinterno della camera e la
pressione atmosferica sia inferiore a 0.05 bar.
Verify the efficiency of the device intervention checking it allows the opening manoeuvre only if the
difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure does not exceed
0.05 bar.
Per la verifica si utilizza il vapore e sar necessario istallare, in comunicazione con la camera
interna, un manometro con scala sufficientemente valida per apprezzare lo 0.01 bar e con
fondo scala non superiore a 0.5 bar.
This check is carried out by using steam. It is necessary to install a pressure gauge connected to the
internal chamber. The scale of the pressure gauge has to be able to read 0.01 bar and the top of the
scale has not to be higher than 0.5 bar.
Nella camera interna, con coperchio perfettamente chiuso, occorre immettere il fluido fino a
raggiungere una pressione di circa 0.2-0.5 bar. Il fluido deve poi essere scaricato lentamente,
aprendo il rubinetto frontale (fig. 1).
Introduce the fluid in the internal chamber, keeping the cover perfectly closed, until a pressure of
approximately 0.2-0.5 bar is reached. The fluid has to be discharged slowly, opening the frontal cock
(fig. 1).
ID no. 86678
fig. 1
Durante la fase di scarico, loperatore dovr continuamente tenere sotto controllo lingresso
digitale n 1 e la pressione indicata sul manometro. Nellistante in cui lingresso digitale passa
dallo stato 1 allo stato 0, se il dispositivo efficiente, la pressione letta non deve essere
superiore a 0.05 bar.
During the unloading phase, the operator has to check continuously the n 1 digital input and the
value on the pressure gauge. When the digital input state varies from 1 to 0, the pressure diplayed
has not to be higher than 0.05 bar. This condition is satisfied when the device works correctly
Qualora il valore letto durante il passaggio di stato risulti inferiore a quello ammesso, la
taratura rientra nei parametri di sicurezza. Se la commutazione avviene ad una variazione di
pressione superiore a 0.05 bar, una volta riportata la pressione della macchina a zero, sar
necessario smontare e revisionare il dispositivo agendo come al punto 3.
If during the variation of the digital input state the readout is lower than the allowed value, the valve is
calibrated correctly and satisfies the safety measures. When the level commutation varies over the
allowed pressure value 0.05 bar, it will be necessary (when the pressure has reached zero) to
disassemble and overhaul the device, proceeding as described in subsection 3.
ID no. 86678
3. REVISIONE COMPLETA DEL DISPOSITIVO

DEVICE COMPLETE OVERHAUL


Svitare le viti (1) del supporto microinterruttore. Dopodich il dispositivo pu essere

integralmente smontato.
Remove the microswitch support screws (1). Afterwards, the device can be fully disassembled (fig.2).
Verificare lo stato fisico della membrana (2): sar necessaria la sostituzione in presenza di forti
incisioni o di elevata rigidezza dovuta ad invecchiamento (fig. 2).
Check the physical condition of the membrane (2); a replacement will be necessary in case of
conspicuous cuts, or rigidity due to aging (fig. 2).
Verificare che lalberino (3) non abbia incisioni sulla sua superficie tali da ostacolarne lo
scorrimento assiale (fig. 2).
Check the shaft (3) is not scored on its surface to the point of hindering its axial sliding (fig. 2).
Verificare lefficienza del microinterruttore (4) controllandone il funzionamento con il tester e
verificando che i fissaggi dei cavi elettrici ai rispettivi morsetti siano puliti o non presentino
tracce di corrosione (fig. 2).
Check that the microswitch (4) is working properly using a tester and check that the couplings of the
electrical cables to the respective terminals are clean and unaffected by traces of corrosion (fig. 2).
Pulire tutte le parti smontate e verificare lassenza di rotture o danneggiamenti sulle parti
costituenti lassieme. Se durante le verifiche si notano imperfezioni o usure dei particolari
interessati, questi andranno immediatamente sostituiti.
Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage of damage of the parts forming the
assembly. In case of imperfections or wear, the affected parts have to be replaced immediately.
Dopo aver effettuato la revisione e le eventuali sostituzioni e aver rimontato a perfetta regola
darte tutte le parti componenti, occorre effettuare con cura la verifica di efficienza del
dispositivo indicata al procedimento 2.
After overhauling and replacing as necessary, and after reassembling all the components to the best
standards of workmanship, test carefully the correct operation of the device as described in section
2.
ID no. 86678
fig. 2
ID no. 86679
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: FILTRO IN CAMERA
FVG: FILTER IN CHAMBER

GM300184 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
Filtro in camera con elemento filtrante in rete metallica.
Filter in the chamber with metallic trap filtering element.
Pulizia filtro: Quotidianamente Operazioni effettuabili solamente da
Filter cleaning: Daily personale qualificato.
Sostituzione O-ring: Quando richiesto Operations to be carried out by skilled
O-ring replacement: When required personnel only.

Guanti
Gloves

ID no. 86679
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
ATTENZIONE!
WARNING!


La camera e il filtro possono raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare la massima

attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei.
The chamber and the filter may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks.
Use the suitable protection means.
Non estrarre il filtro se sul fondo sono raccolti

frammenti, vetri, sostanze come Agar, ecc
Rimuovere tutte le sostanze solide
accuratamente ed accertarsi che, durante
lestrazione del filtro, non ne cadano nel
pozzetto di scarico: queste intaserebbero e
danneggerebbero le valvole dellautoclave.
Do not extract the filter if, on the bottom,
fragments, glasses, substances like Agar, etc are
collected.
Remove carefully all the solid substances and
verify during the extraction of the filter they do not
fall in the drainage trap. The substances could stop
or damage the autoclaves valves.
ID no. 86679
Pulizia filtro e sostituzione

Filter cleaning and replacement
Aprire lautoclave.
Open the autoclave.
Estrarre dalla propria sede il corpo del filtro agendo sullimpugnatura di cui dotato.
Remove the filter body from its housing by its handle.
Liberare il filtro metallico da residui macroscopici eventualmente presenti (scaglie di vetro,
frammenti organici, ecc...).
Clear the metal filter from any macroscopic residues (glass splinters, organic fragments, etc...).
Pulire accuratamente tutti gli orifizi della rete metallica con lausilio di un getto daria compressa
o bagno ad ultrasuoni.
Clean carefully all the wire net orifices, also using, if necessary, a jet of compressed air or an ultrasound
bath.
Verificare lassenza di rotture, incrinature o danneggiamenti vari sulle parti costituenti il filtro ed
il corpo filtro.
Check that the parts forming the filter and its body are not broken, cracked or damaged.
Controllare la condizione dell O-ring ed eventualmente sostituirlo con uno nuovo.
Check the O-ring wearing, and if necessary replace it with a new ones.
Reinserire il filtro in camera nel proprio alloggiamento.
Replace the chamber filter back in its seat.
ID no. 86680
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: VALVOLE DI SICUREZZA
FVG: SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

CJ060365
NUOVA COI
CJ060366
Valvole di sicurezza per camera e generatore di vapore
Chamber and steam generator safety relief valves

Verifica efficienza di sfogo: Settimanale

Operazioni effettuabili solamente
Checking correct vent: Weekly
da personale qualificato.
Verifica taratura e capacit di sfogo: Mensile
Checking calibration and venting capacity: Monthly Operations to be carried out by skilled
personnel only.
Sostituzione: Quando necessario
Replacement: When necessary
Chiave esagonale: Guanti:

Hex wrench: Gloves:

ID no. 86680
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
1. VERIFICA EFFICENZA SFOGO

CORRECT VENTING CHECKING
Allentare la ghiera dellotturatore mentre la macchina ad un valore di pressione inferiore
rispetto a quello massimo di esercizio.
Loosen the upper ring of the shutter while the machine pressure is lower than the maximum operating
value.
Questa prova necessaria per controllare che tra otturatore e sede della valvola non ci siano
incollamenti o impedimenti che ne impediscono lapertura.
This test is necessary to check there is no jamming or obstacles between the shutter and the valve
seat that could hinder opening.
2. VERIFICA TARATURA E CAPACIT DI SFOGO

CALIBRATION AND VENTING CAPACITY CHECKING VALVOLA IMMISSIONE
INFEED VALVE
C08
Elevare la pressione allinterno del recipiente (camera o
generatore di vapore) fino alla pressione massima
ammissibile e controllare il momento in cui la valvola
VALVOLA SICUREZZA
comincia ad aprirsi. GENERATORE
Verificare che la sovrapressione (o il valore di pressione) SAFETY VALVE
GENERETOR
alla quale la valvola completamente aperta non superi del
10% il valore della pressione massima ammissibile.
Raise the pressure inside the vessel (chamber or steam
generator) to the maximum allowable pressure value and then
check at which point the valve begins to open.
Check that the overpressure (or the pressure) at which the valve
is fully open is not more than 10% above the maximum
allowable pressure value.
Durante questa prova si deve controllare che la pressione
allinterno della macchina, con aperta la valvola
dimmissione fluido (C08) e la valvola di sicurezza
completamente aperta, non aumenti oltre il valore della
pressione massima ammissibile.
During this test it is also necessary to check that the pressure
inside the machine, while the fluid infeed valve (C08) and the
safety valve are open is fully open, does not increase beyond
the maximum allowable pressure value.
La macchina equipaggiata con valvole di sicurezza
calibrate dal fabbricante e controllate da FEDEGARI
AUTOCLAVI nella sua officina ad una pressione ambiente di VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA
CAMERA
1 bar SAFETY VALVE
Nel caso la macchina venga istallata in localit con CHAMBER
pressione ambiente diversa da 1 bar ( 10%), FEDEGARI
raccomanda che il personale qualificato e/o i tecnici
autorizzati per listallazione della macchina, ricalibrino le
valvole in relazione alla nuova pressione ambientale prima
della messa in servizio. Questo accorgimento garantisce
sicurezza e corrette condizioni di utilizzo.
ID no. 86680
The machine has been equipped with safety relief valves calibrated by manufacturer and controlled
by FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI in its workshop at a room pressure equal to 1 bar.
If the machine should work at an external pressure different from 1 bar ( 10%), FEDEGARI
recommends that qualified personnel and/or engineers authorized to install the machine itself,
recalibrate valves according to new room pressure before starting to work. This device assures safety
and correct operating conditions.
fig.A fig. B fig. C
3. SOSTITUZIONE DELLA VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA

REPLACEMENT OF THE SAFETY VALVE
Rimuovere il portello anteriore della macchina per cambiare la valvola di sicurezza del
generatore (fig. B) o il portello posteriore della macchina per eventuale sostituzione la valvola
di sicurezza della camera (fig. C).
Remove the front panel of the machine to replace the safety valve of the generator (fig.B) or the
posterior panel of the machine to replace the safety valve of the chamber (fig.C).
ATTENZIONE!
WARNING!


La camera e gli elementi al suo interno possono raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare
la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei.
The chamber and the elements to its inside may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention
to burn risks. Use the suitable protection means.
Verificare che non ci sia pi pressione in camera e nei condotti

Verify there is no more pressure in the chamber and in the piping
ID no. 86680
Aprire lattacco rapido e sfilare la valvola di sicurezza; svitare poi il tubo di sfiato dalla
valvola.
Open the clamp and remove the safety valve; unscrew the breather pipe from the safety valve.
Sostituire lanello di centraggio, lO-ring e la valvola di sicurezza; avvitare il tubo di sfiato
sulla valvola.
Replace the guide ring, the O-ring and the safety valve with new ones; screw the breather pipe on
the valve.
Fissare il tutto con lattacco rapido.
Fix with a clamp.
Verificare il corretto funzionamento della valvola di sicurezza sostituita.
Verify the right working of the replaced safety valve.
Rimontare i pannelli alla fine delle operazioni di verifica.
Reassemble the panels after the controls.
ID no. 86681
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: VALVOLA MANUALE
FVG: MANUAL VALVE

GM150174 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
Valvola manuale di scarico camera
Manual valve for discharging chamber
Controlli: Quotidianamente Operazioni effettuabili solamente da
Checking: Daily personale qualificato.
Sostituzione: Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by skilled
Replacement: When necessary personnel only.
Cacciaviti:
Chiave esagonale
Screwdrivers:
Hex wrench:
Chiavi a
Guanti:
brugola:
Gloves:
Allen wrench:

ID no. 86681
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
1. CONTROLLO DELLA VALVOLA MANUALE

MANUAL VALVE CHECK
Il controllo deve essere effettuato quotidianamente.
Carry out the check daily.
La macchina deve essere accesa e il controllore di processo attivato.
The machine has to be switched on and the process controller has to be activated.
Eseguire il test al termine di un ciclo di TEST VUOTO CAMERA.
At the end of a cycle, start a VACUUM CHAMBER test.
Durante la fase di tenuta vuoto o tenuta pressione, aprire leggermente la valvola e
verificare che si abbia una variazione di pressione in camera.
During the vacuum seal or the pressure seal phases, open sligthly the valve and check there is a
pressure variation in the chamber.
ATTENZIONE!
WARNING!


2. MANUTENZIONE O SOSTITUZIONE DELLA VALVOLA MANUALE

MANUAL VALVE MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
Se a causa di perdite o di un non corretto funzionamento della valvola sar necessario
procedere alla sostituzione di uno o pi elementi che compongono il rubinetto.
In case of losses or of bad functioning of the valve, it will be necessary to replace one or more
elements forming the cock.
Rimuovere lo sportello anteriore svitando le quattro viti di fissaggio (fig. 1).
Remove the front door unscrewing the four locking screws (fig. 1).
fig. 1
ID no. 86681
Per sostituire le parti usurate o guaste, sar necessario smontare la valvola come in fig. 2.
To replace worn or broken parts, it will be necessary to disassemble the valve as in fig. 2.
Sostituire le parti usurate.
Replace the worn parts.
Verificare il corretto funzionamento come indicato al punto 1.
Check the right operation as indicated at point 1.
fig. 2
ID no. 86682
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: TERMORESISTENZA
FVG: THERMAL PROBE

PM600045 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
Termoresistenza Pt100 4 FILI 4.8 3m
Thermal probe Pt100 4 WIRES 4.8 3m
Manutenzione e controlli: Settimanale Operazioni effettuabili solamente
Cleaning and checking: Weekly da personale qualificato.
Sostituzione: Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by
Replacement: When necessary skilled personnel only.

Cacciaviti:
Chiave esagonale:
Screwdrivers:
Hex wrench:
Guanti:
Gloves:

ID no. 86682
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
ATTENZIONE!
WARNING!

The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched
off.

La camera e gli elementi al suo interno possono raggiungere temperature elevate.

Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione
idonei.
The chamber and the elements inside may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost
attention to burn risks. Use the suitable protection means.
1. MANUTENZIONE E CONTROLLO DELLA TERMORESISTENZA

MAINTENANCE AND CHECK OF THE THERMAL PROBE
Estrarre la termoresistenza dallinterno della camera.
Extract the thermal probe from the internal of the chamber.
Pulire la testa del sensore impiegando acqua in soluzione con detergenti neutri ed uno
straccio di cotone.
Clean the head of the sensor employing water in solution with neutral detergents and a cotton
cloth.
Verificare che sul rivestimento esterno non ci siano fori o intagli; in caso contrario,
sostituirlo.
Verify there are not holes or notching on the outer cover otherwise replace it.
Pulire la guaina utilizzando acqua in soluzione con detergenti neutri ed una spugna non
abrasiva.
Clean the cover using water in solution with neutral detergents and a not abrasive sponge.
Verificare che non ci siano intagli o forature sulla guaina, in caso contrario, sostituire.
Verify there are not holes or notching on the cover otherwise replace it.
2. VERIFICA DI FUNZIONAMENTO
OPERATING CHECK
Premere il tasto CLEAR

Press the key CLEAR
Premere il tasto D
Press the key D
Premere il tasto 3
Press the key 3
Premere il tasto 4
Press the key 4.
ID no. 86682
Se le operazioni sopra elencate sono state eseguite correttamente sul monitor apparir la
temperatura interna della camera dellautoclave alla temperatura ambiente.
If the listed operations have been correctly executed the inner temperature of the chamber of the
autoclave to the room temperature will be displayed on the monitor.
Se appare una temperatura diversa da quella della camera alla temperatura ambiente,
procedere ad una calibratura dello strumento rivolgendosi a tecnici o a servizi specializzati.
If anomalies are supposed, a new calibration of the instrument has to be done, addressing to a
technician or to a specialized service.
Se visualizzato il messaggio di errore o lo strumento va a fondo scala (850C), necessario
verificare che arrivi il segnale dalla termoresistenza alla scheda di controllo.
If error messages are displayed or if the instrument goes to end scale (850C) it is necessary to verify
the arrival signal to the control card from the thermal probe.
Premere il tasto ENTER per cancellare il messaggio di errore.

Press the key ENTER to delete the error message.
Premere il tasto CLEAR per tornare al menu principale.

Press the key CLEAR to return to the main menu.
A ON ACK 1/1
TE UNSERVICEABLE
ID no. 86682
3. SOSTITUZIONE SONDA
PROBE REPLACEMENT
Rimuovere i pannelli laterali (fig.1).
Remove lateral panels (fig.1).
Scollegare il connettore PT100 dal lato inferiore della
scheda controllo, (figg. 2 e 3).
Disconnect PT100 connector from the inferior side of the
control card (figg.2 and 3).
Rimuovere le eventuali fascette che fissano il cavo della
termoresistenza.
Remove any ties that stop the cable of the thermal probe.
fig.1
fig. 2 fig. 3 fig. 4

Separare il cavo della termoresistenza dal
connettore PT100.
Separate the cable of the thermal probe from
the PT100 connector.
Svitare il morsetto attacco rapido (fig. 4).
Unscrew the clamp (fig. 4). ATTACCO
Sfilare il tappo forato dallattacco. CONNECTION
Unthread the hollow plug from the attack. O-RING
Sfilare il cavo dal tappo.
Unthread the cable from the plug. DISCO
DISK
Estrarre la termoresistenza dal condotto.
Extract the thermal probe from the pipeline.
O-RING
Verificare gli O-ring di tenuta del tappo. Per
una eventuale sostituzione, fare riferimento GHIERA
alla fig. 5. RING
Check the held O-ring of the stopper, in order CLAMP
to replace them (fig.5). TERMORESISTENZA
THERMAL PROBE
fig. 5
ID no. 86682
Prendere il tappo e rimuovere il disco dalla ghiera con laiuto di un cacciavite o di un

grimaldello.
Take the stopper and remove the disc from the metal ring with a screwdriver or a picklock.
Infilare la ghiera sul cavo della nuova termoresistenza, avendo cura di tenere la parte con il
diametro minore verso lesterno della macchina.
Thread the metal ring on the cable of the new thermal probe holding the smaller diameter part
towards the external side of the machine.
Infilare il nuovo O-ring.
Thread the new O-ring.
Infilare il disco sul cavo e incastrarlo nella ghiera.
Thread the disc on the cable embedding it in the metal ring.
Inserire il disco di centraggio nellattacco e fissarlo con il morsetto.
Insert the stopper in the attack fixing it with the clamp.
Inserire allestremit del cavo i capocorda e avvitare sul connettore PT100 (fig. 6).
Insert to the extremity of the cable the cable terminal and then screw it on the PT100 connector
(fig.6).
fig. 6
Reinserire il connettore nella scheda di controllo.

Reinsert the connector in the control card.
Infilare in camera la termoresistenza attraverso il condotto, avendo laccortezza di non
graffiarla o danneggiarla.
Thread into the chamber the thermal probe through the piping, not scratching or damaging it.
Fissare con delle fascette il filo della termoresistenza allinterno della macchina.
Fix with some ties the thermal probe cable to the machine internal.
Rimontare i pannelli esterni della macchina.
Reassemble the external panels of the machine.
ID no. 86683
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: STAMAPANTE
FVG: PRINTER

CE020017 Custom
Stampante CUSTOM FT190-S3
Printer CUSTOM FT190-S3
Controllo stampante: Giornaliero
Operazioni effettuabili solamente
Printer checking: Daily
da personale qualificato.
Sostituzione rotolo carta: Quando necessario
Coil paper replacement: When necessary
Operations to be carried out by skilled
Sostituzione stampante: Quando necessario
personnel only.
Printer replacement: When necessary
Chiave esagonale: Cacciaviti:

Hex wrench: Screwdrivers:

ID no. 86683
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
1. CONTROLLO STAMPANTE
PRINTER CHECK
La carta nella stampante deve risultare ben

allineata.
The paper in the printer has to be lined up
Il rotolo di alimentazione deve avere una
quantit di carta sufficiente per poter
ultimare la stampa relativa ad un ciclo di
sterilizzazione.
The feeding coil has to dispose of a sufficient
amount of paper in order to complete the
relative print of a sterilization cycle.
Rimuovere con uno spazzolino o con
dellaria compressa (a bassa pressione) la
polvere di carta che pu depositarsi
allinterno della stampante e togliere i
residui grossolani di carta che potrebbero
esserci allinterno della stampante.
Remove with a small brush or compressed air
(low pressure) the paper powder that can be
collected inside the printer and remove
possible residuals of paper.
ID no. 86683
2. SOSTITUZIONE ROTOLO CARTA ESAURITO O INCEPPATO.

EXAUSTED OR JAMMED COIL PAPER REPLACEMENT
SE LA CARTA NON SUFFICIENTE O SE INCEPPATA NECESSARIO:
IF THE PAPER IS NOT ENOUGH OR IF IT IS JAMMED:
Aprire il portello di accesso alla stampante.

Open the front panel.
Premere il pulsante (PUSH) sul supporto basculante del meccanismo di caricamento
carta.
Press the key (PUSH) on the balancing support of the paper loading mechanism.
Se il rotolo di carta solo da sostituire, posizionare il nuovo rotolo di carta sul
supporto basculante; se si deve rimuovere la carta inceppata, tagliare in modo netto la
carta del rotolo e rimuovere la carta inceppata o danneggiata.
If the coil has only to be replaced, put the new coil of paper on the balancing support; if the
jammed paper has to be removed, cut the paper of the coil, and remove the jammed or
damaged paper.
Introdurre il lembo iniziale della carta nel meccanismo di stampa.
Insert the initial border of the paper into the print mechanism.
Ripristinare il meccanismo di caricamento carta premendo il tasto PUSH.
To restore the paper loading mechanism, press the key PUSH.
Premere il tasto FEED per creare un esubero di carta al fine di facilitare la sua
introduzione nella fessura sul portello di accesso della stampante.
Press the key FEED in order to create a excess of paper to make its introduction in the
fissure on the front panel easier.
Chiudere il portello di accesso alla stampante.
Close the front panel.
ID no. 86683
3. SOSTITUZIONE STAMPANTE
PRINTER REPLACEMENT
Rimuovere il pannello frontale della macchina.

Remove the front panel of the machine.
Aprire lo sportello della stampante e con
lausilio di un cacciavite rimuovere le due viti di
fissaggio, facendo attenzione a non far cadere le
due staffe a L che si trovano sul retro della
stampante.
Open the front panel of the printer and with a
screwdriver remove the two stop screws, paying
attention the two L brackets on the back of printer
not to fall.
Dopo aver tolto le due staffe a L, estrarre la
stampante.
After the removal of the two L brackets, extract the
printer.
Una volta estratta staccare i due connettori posti
sul retro della stampante e sostituirla.
When the printer has been extracted completely,
detach the two connectors on the back of printer
and replace it.
Rimontare la stampante eseguendo in senso
inverso le operazioni descritte nei punti
precedenti.
Reassemble the printer following the operations in
reverse order.
Verificare il corretto funzionamento della nuova
stampante.
Check the correct operation of the new printer.
MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET ID no. 86204
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/4
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
Valvole di ritegno singole e inserite in gruppi distributori.
Check valves stand--alone and fitted on manifolds.

MONTAGGIO FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.
MOUNTING
DN su linea su pompa vuoto verticale
on line on vacuum pump vertical
GM350227 GM350241
10 GM350240 --
GM350204
GM350255
GM350218
16 GM350243 -- GM350242
GM350244
GM350221
22 GM350223 GM350246 GM350245
GM350247
GM350224
35 GM350250 GM350248 GM350249
GM350251
48 GM350226 -- GM350252
Valvola di ritegno a piattello
Shutter check valve
1 -- Sostituzione piattello, O--ring, anello Annuale Operazioni effettuabili solamente
di centraggio e molla. Yearly da personale qualificato.
Shutter, O--ring, centering Operations to be carried out by
ring and spring replacement.
skilled personnel only.

S Chiave esagonale: 27 -- 32 -- 36 -- 41 -- 46 -- 60 -- 64 -- 65 mm
Hex wrench
S Chiavi a brugola: 6 mm
Allen wrench

Prepared by IDO FAP 18/05/05 Checked and approved by ING FAF 18/05/05
Rev. 1 -- Page 2/4
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
1. OPERAZIONI PRELIMINARI
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
ATTENZIONE !
WARNING !
Prima di eseguire la manutenzione indispensabile accertarsi che non esista pressione
residua.
Before starting maintenance it is essential to make sure that there is no residual pressure.
ATTENZIONE !
WARNING !
La valvola pu raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare la massima attenzione al
pericolo di scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei.
The valve may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the suitable
protection means.
1.1. La seguente manutenzione deve essere eseguita a sterilizzatore spento.

The following maintenance must be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.
1.2. Se la valvola singola e le condizioni dellimpianto lo permettono, rimuoverla e

posizionarla su un idoneo banco di lavoro. Nel caso in cui la valvola inserita in un gruppo
distributore o il suo smontaggio dalla linea risultasse difficoltoso, la manutenzione pu
essere comunque eseguita a bordo macchina.
If the valve is installed as a stand--alone component and, if allowed by the conditions of the system,
remove the valve and place it on a suitable workbench. If the valve is part of a manifold or if it is
difficult to remove from the line, maintenance can be performed with the valve installed on the
machine.
2. SOSTITUZIONE PIATTELLO, O--RING, E MOLLA VALVOLE DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35

SHUTTER, O--RING, AND SPRING DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35 VALVESREPLACEMENT
2.1. Separare la flangia (1) dalla flangia (2) utilizzando due chiavi esagonali (Fig. 1).
Using two hex wrenches, separate the flange (1) from the flange (2) (Fig. 1).
2.2. Togliere lO--ring (3) e il fondello (4) (Fig. 1).

Remove the O--ring (3) and the bottom (4) (Fig. 1).
2.3. Sfilare il piattello (5) e la molla (6) dalla flangia (1) (Fig. 1).
Remove the shutter (5) and the spring (6) from the flange (1) (Fig. 1).
2.4. Togliere gli O--ring (7) dal piattello (5) (Fig. 1).
Remove the O--rings (7) from the shutter (5) (Fig. 1).
NOTA
NOTE
La molla (6) non presente nelle valvole montate verticalmente.
Gli O--ring (7) non sono presenti nelle valvole DN10 -- DN16 e in tutte quelle montate
verticalmente.
The spring (6) is not present into the vertical mounting valves.
The O--rings (7) are not present into the DN10 -- DN16 valves and into all the vertical mounting
valves.
Rev. 1 -- Page 3/4
2.5. Pulire tutte le parti smontate e verificare lassenza di rotture o danneggiamenti vari sulle
parti costituenti lassieme.
Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage or damage to the parts that form the
assembly.
2.6. Sostituire il piattello (5), gli O--ring (3--7) e la molla (6) (Fig. 1).
Replace the shutter (5), the O--rings (3--7) and the spring (6) (Fig. 1).
2.7. Rimontare la valvola eseguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte nei precedenti
punti.
Reassemble the valve by performing in reverse the operations described above.
2
7
Figura 1 -- Manutenzione valvole DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35.

Figure 1 -- DN10 -- DN20 -- DN26 -- DN34 valves maintenance.
Rev. 1 -- Page 4/4
3. SOSTITUZIONE PIATTELLO, O--RING, ANELLO DI CENTRAGGIO E MOLLA VALVOLE DN48

REPLACE THE SHUTTER, O--RING, CENTERING RING AND SPRING DN48 VALVES
3.1. Togliere il morsetto di fissaggio (1) (Fig. 2)

Remove the fixing clamp (1) (Fig. 2).
3.2. Separare la flangia (2) dalla flangia (3) (Fig. 2).
Separate the flange (2) from the flange (3) (Fig. 2).
3.3. Togliere lanello di centraggio (4) e lO--ring (5) (Fig. 2).
Remove the centering ring (4) and the O--ring (5) (Fig. 2).
3.4. Sfilare il piattello (6) e la molla (7) dalla flangia (3) (Fig. 2).
Remove the shutter (6) and the spring (7) from the flange (3) (Fig. 2).
3.5. Togliere gli O--ring (8) dal piattello (6) (Fig. 1).
Remove the O--rings (8) from the shutter (6) (Fig. 1).
NOTA
NOTE
La molla (7) e gli O--ring (8) non sono presenti nella valvola montata verticalmente.
The spring (7) and the O--ring (8) are not present into the vertical mounting valve.
3.6. Pulire tutte le parti smontate e verificare lassenza di rotture o danneggiamenti vari sulle
parti costituenti lassieme.
Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage or damage to the parts that form the
assembly.
3.7. Sostituire il piattello (6), gli O--ring (5--8), anello di centraggio (4) e la molla (7) (Fig. 1).
Replace the shutter (6), the O--rings (5--8), centering ring (4) and the spring (7) (Fig. 1).
3.8. Rimontare la valvola eseguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte nei precedenti
punti.
Reassemble the valve by performing in reverse the operations described above.
2
1
4
3
5
Figura 2 -- Manutenzione valvole DN48.

Figure 2 -- Maintenance DN48 valves.
ID no. 86685
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: GUARNIZIONE COPERCHIO
FVG: COVER GASKET

PP600264
FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.P.A.
PP600265
Guarnizione in gomma siliconica a sezione piena

Silicon rubber gasket with solid section

Controllo: Mensile Operazioni effettuabili solamente

Checking: Monthly da personale qualificato.
Sostituzione: Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by
Replacement: When necessary skilled personnel only.
Chiave a brugola:
Allen wrench:
Apposito attrezzo cuneiforme fornito da FEDEGARI (cod. PP400070):

Proper wedge-shaped tool supplied by FEDEGARI (cod. PP400070):

ID no. 86685
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS

1. CONTROLLO GUARNIZIONE
GASKET CHECKING
Ruotare il coperchio in posizione di apertura (fig. 1).
Rotate the cover at the opening position (fig. 1).
Controllare la forma e la consistenza della guarnizione (fig. 2): non deve presentare rotture,
screpolature o risultare secca. Controllare la perfetta tenuta della guarnizione.
Check the shape and the consistency of the gasket (fig. 2): it has not to be dry or have breaking or
crazing. Check the gaskets seal.
Controllare che non ci siano particelle metalliche o di altro materiale (vetro, etc.) penetrate
nella massa della guarnizione.
Check there are not metal or other material particles (glass, etc.) in the gaskets mass.
Controllare che non si manifestino fenomeni di incollaggio della guarnizione (dovuti per
esempio ad uso di qualche agente chimico per la pulizia della macchina).
Check there are not cases of gaskets jamming (caused by chemical agents used to clean the
machine).
Se i risultati delle precedenti verifiche sono negativi o incerti passare al punto 2.
If the results of the check are negative or doubtful, proceed to point 2.
fig. 1 fig. 2
ID no. 86685
2. SOSTITUZIONE GUARNIZIONE
GASKET REPLACEMENT
Togliere il pannello laterale destro rimuovendo le 4 viti di bloccaggio (fig. 3).
Remove the right side panel unscrewing the four locking screws (fig. 3).
Aprire lo sterilizzatore e svitare le 4 viti che bloccano il carter del coperchio (fig. 4).
Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws blocking the cover casing (fig. 4).
Togliere il carter.
Remove the casing.
Mettere in pressione la guarnizione agendo sul comando manuale dellelettrovalvola E012
(fig. 5) assicurandosi che la dicitura riportata sia la suddetta.
Get up steam the gasket operating with the hand drive of the E012 electro-valve (fig. 5) checking the
exact wording.
Laria compressa presente nei condotti e nella sede della guarnizione espeller la
guarnizione dalla sua sede.
The compressed air in the piping and in the gasket housing will discharge the gasket from its
housing.
Agire sul comando manuale dellelettrovalvola E013 per interrompere il flusso dellaria alla
guarnizione (fig. 5) assicurandosi che la dicitura riportata sia la suddetta.
Operate with the hand drive of the E013 electro-valve to stop the air flow to the gasket (fig. 5); check
the exact wording.
Estrarre completamente la guarnizione dalla sua sede (fig. 6).
Pull out the gasket from its housing (fig. 6).
Inserire la nuova guarnizione nella propria sede avendo cura di non danneggiarne i bordi. La
guarnizione stampata in un unico pezzo per cui rispecchia fedelmente il disegno della sede
(fig. 6).
Settle the new gasket in its housing without damaging the borders. The gasket is printed in one
piece reflecting exactly the housing design (fig. 6).
Controllare il funzionamento dellelettrovalvola di messa in pressione.
Check the functioning of getting-up steam electro-valve.
Controllare la perfetta tenuta del coperchio; se la guarnizione non tiene, verificare
innanzitutto che sia stata montata correttamente, che non ci sia dello sporco residuo o che
non sia stata danneggiata durante la fase di montaggio.
Check the covers seal; if it does not hold, verify the right assembling, check it is not dirty or
damaged during the assembling.
ID no. 86685
fig. 3 fig. 4
E013 E012
fig. 5
ID no. 86685
fig. 6
ID no. 86686
APPARECCHIATURA
EQUIPMENT
FVG: GENERATORE DI VAPORE
FVG: STEAM GENERATOR

GL200070 FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.P.A.
Assieme generatore di vapore
Steam generator assembly
Controllo generale: Mensile Operazioni effettuabili solamente
General checking: Monthly da personale qualificato.
Pulizia camera generatore di vapore: Quando necessario Operations to be carried out by
Steam generator chamber cleaning: When necessary skilled personnel only.
Controllo e pulizia termostato:
Thermostats checking and cleaning:
Sostituzione termostati:
Thermostats replacement:
Controllo, pulizia e sostituzione resistenza
elettrica:
Heating element check, cleaning and
replacement:

Guanti: Cacciaviti:
Gloves: Screwdrivers:

ID no. 86686
OPERAZIONI
OPERATIONS
Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione al

pericolo di scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione.
The steam generator can reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the
1. CONTROLLO GENERALE
GENERAL CHECKING
Rimuovere il portello anteriore e il portello destro dello sterilizzatore (fig. 1).
Remove the front and the right panel of the sterilizer (fig. 1).
Durante il funzionamento, verificare che le condotte idrauliche e le linee pneumatiche siano
integre, non presentino incrinature o deformazioni; verificare inoltre lassenza di perdite di
liquidi o getti di fluidi in pressione dai raccordi del generatore di vapore (fig. 2).
During the work, check that the hydraulic piping and the pneumatic lines are intact, with no cracks
or deformations; verify also there are no leaks of liquids or jets of pressurized fluids from the steam
generator junctions (fig. 2).
Verificare lintegrit fisica della linee elettriche e lassenza di tratti non isolati, tranciamenti o
imbandi con raggi di curvatura troppo stretti.
Check the physical integrity of the electric lines and verify there are not uninsulated portions, cuts
or slacks with too tight radius of curvature.
Verificare lassenza di rotture, di incrinature o di danneggiamenti vari, sulle parti costituenti
il generatore di vapore.
Check the parts forming the steam generator are not broken, cracked or damaged.
fig. 1
fig. 2
ID no. 86686
Il seguente controllo e relativa manutenzione devono essere eseguiti a sterilizzatore

spento.

Check that the electric power supply and the other utilities are disconnected.
2. PULIZIA CAMERA GENERATORE DI VAPORE

STEAM GENERATOR CHAMBER CLEANING
Svuotare il generatore di vapore aprendo il rubinetto di scarico (fig. 3).
Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock (fig.3).
Togliere il morsetto di fissaggio che unisce la condotta del vapore al generatore, lanello di
centraggio e lO-ring (fig. 4).
Remove the fixing clamp connecting the steam pipe to the generator, the centering ring and the O-
ring (fig. 4).
Procedere al lavaggio utilizzando soluzione disincrostante o acido acetico diluito (fig. 5).
Wash the steam generator with a descaling solution or by diluted acetic acid (fig. 5).
Rimontare lanello di centraggio, lO-ring e il morsetto di fissaggio.
Reassemble the centering ring, the O-ring and the fixing clamp.
Ad istallazione ultimata chiudere il rubinetto di scarico e riempire il generatore di vapore
con acqua deionizzata.
After the installation, close the drain cock and fill the steam generator with deionized water.
fig. 3
fig. 4
fig. 5
ID no. 86686
NOTA
NOTE
Lacqua deionizzata deve avere caratteristiche di conducibilit ben precise.
Una minore conducibilit dellacqua consente infatti di minimizzare le operazioni di pulizia
del generatore di vapore dalle incrostazioni calcaree.
Si consiglia di utilizzare acque con conducibilit di 5 S/cm (a 25 C); possibile utilizzare
acque con conducibilit superiore comportando per un aumento della frequenza di
manutenzione del generatore di vapore.
Si sconsiglia decisamente lutilizzo di acqua con conducibilit superiore a 30 S/cm.
Le seguenti informazioni possono essere cos riassunte.
- Conducibilit raccomandata: da 2 a 15 S/cm, con ispezione del generatore ogni anno.
- Conducibilit ammessa: fino a 30 S/cm, con ispezione del generatore di vapore ogni sei
mesi.
The deionized water has to have precise conductivity characteristics.
A lower conductivity reduces the cleaning operations of the steam generator from calcareous
scales.
We recommend to use water with a conductivity of 5 S/cm (a 25 C); waters with a higher
conductivity can be equally used but they increase the maintenance frequency of the steam
generator. We recommend to avoid using water with a conductivity higher than 30 S/cm.
Informations summing up.
- Recommended conductivity: 2 to 15 S/cm, inspecting the steam generator every year.
- Admitted conductivity: up to 30 S/cm, inspecting the steam generator every six months.

spento.

Check that the electric power supply and the other utilities are disconnected.
3. CONTROLLO E PULIZIA TERMOSTATO

THERMOSTATS CHECKING AND CLEANING
Sfilare il bulbo del termostato dal generatore di vapore (fig. 6); verificare lassenza di
incrostazioni e se necessario pulirlo impiegando una soluzione disincrostante o acidi
acetico diluito.
Unthread the thermostat bulb from the steam generator (fig. 6)and check it is not scaled; if
necessary, clean it with a descaling solution or diluted acetic acid.
fig. 6
ID no. 86686
Immergere il bulbo del termostato di controllo della temperatura massima del generatore di
vapore in un bagno termostatico a 169C.
Posizionare su ON linterruttore generale e verificare che al raggiungimento della
temperatura di 169C, linterruttore generale si riporti in OFF arrestando il funzionamento
della macchina. In caso di mancato funzionamento del termostato, procedere alla sua
sostituzione.
Plunge the thermostat bulb which controls the maximum temperature of the steam generator in a
169 C temperature bath.
Put the main switch on ON position and check that, when the temperature reaches 169C, the main
switch is on OFF position again stopping the working. If the thermostat does not work, replace it.
Sfilare il bulbo dal bagno termostatico, attendere che si raffreddi e rimontarlo sul corpo del
generatore di vapore.
Unthread the bulb from the temperature bath. When it cools, reassemble it on the steam
generators body.
Scollegare elettricamente il termostato.
Disconnect the thermostat.
Svitare le 2 viti a testa esagonale e rimuovere il termostato.
Unscrew the 2 hex head cap screws and remove the thermostat.
Premere con laiuto di un cacciavite il pulsante di ripristino interno accessibile dallapposita
feritoia.
Press, with a screwdriver, the internal reset button, accessible from the proper loophole.
4. SOSTITUZIONE TERMOSTATI
THERMOSTATS REPLACEMENT
Scollegare elettricamente iI termostato.

Disconnect the thermostat.
Svitare le 2 viti a testa esagonale e rimuovere il termostato.
Unscrew the 2 hex head cap screws and remove the thermostat.
Montare un nuovo termostato seguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte in
precedenza.
Install a new thermostat following the operations above described in reverse order.
NOTA:
NOTE:
Lo sterilizzatore si blocca quando lacqua nel generatore di vapore giunge al livello minimo.
A causa delle inerzie termiche dei componenti, lacqua residua continua per a riscaldarsi e
ad evaporare surriscaldando il generatore di vapore; ci fa intervenire il termostato che
manda in blocco lo sterilizzatore. Per riprendere le normali attivit dello sterilizzatore, sar
necessario riportare a livello lacqua nel generatore di vapore e poi ripristinare il termostato
come descritto sopra.
The sterilizer stops working when the water arrives at a minimum level in the steam generator.
Because of the thermal inertia the residual water goes on evaporating, overheating the steam
generator causing the block of the machine. To restore the activities of the sterilizer, bring back to
level the water in the steam generator.
5. CONTROLLO, PULIZIA E SOSTITUZIONE RESISTENZA ELETTRICA

HEATING ELEMENT CHECKING, CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT

spento.
ID no. 86686
Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione per

pericolo scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione.
The steam generator reaches high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the
Svuotare il generatore di vapore aprendo il rubinetto di scarico come in fig. 3.

Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock as in fig. 3.
Scollegare le connessioni elettriche delle resistenze.
Disconnect the heating element connections.
Svitare le 4 viti utilizzando una chiave esagonale.
Unscrew the 4 screws using an hex wrench.
Sfilare la resistenza e verificare lassenza dincrostazioni, se necessario pulirla impiegando
una soluzione disincrostante o acidi acetico diluito.
Sostituire in caso di danneggiamenti.
Unthread the heating element and check it is not scaled: if necessary, clean with a descaling
solution or diluted acetic acid.
Replace if damaged.
Sostituire lO-ring pulendo accuratamente la sede.
Replace the O-ring after cleaning its seat.
Rimontare i componenti e ricollegare le connessioni elettriche della resistenza.
Reassemble the components and reconnect the electrical connections of the heating element.
fig. 7
ID no. 86686
6. CONTROLLO, PULIZIA E SOSTITUZIONE INTERRUTTORE DI LIVELLO

LEVEL SWITCH CHECKING, CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT

spento.
Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione per

pericolo scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione.
The steam generator reaches high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the
Svuotare il generatore di vapore aprendo il rubinetto di scarico come in fig. 3.

Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock as in fig. 3.
Scollegare le connessioni elettriche dellinterruttore di livello (fig. 8).
Disconnect the electrical connections of the level switches (fig. 8).
Rimuovere gli interruttori di livello dal generatore di vapore e ripulire le rispettive sedi.
Remove the level switches from the steam generator and clean their seats.
Smontare gli interruttori di livello come da figura 9 e verificare lassenza di incrostazioni e
se necessario pulirli impiegando soluzioni disincrostanti o acido acetico diluito.
Sostituire linterruttore di livello in caso di danneggiamenti.
Disassemble the level switches as in fig. 9 and check they are not scaled and, if necessary, clean
them with a descaling solution or diluted acetic acid.
If damaged, replace the lever switch.
Sostituire gli O-ring pulendo accuratamente le loro sedi.
Replace the O-rings cleaning their seats.
Rimontare i componenti eseguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte in precedenza.
Reassemble the components following the operations above described in reverse order.
fig. 8
ID no. 86686
fig. 9
7. CONTROLLO FINALE
FINAL CHECK
Verificare che i morsetti elettrici siano ben serrati.

Check that electric clamp are tightened.
Verificare che le condutture idrauliche e le linee pneumatiche siano state ripristinate
correttamente.
Check that hydraulic piping and the pneumatic lines are correctly restored.
Alimentare elettricamente il generatore di vapore portando su ON linterruttore generale e
verificare il corretto funzionamento della resistenza e dei termostati.
Supply power the steam generator putting on ON position the general switch and check the correct
work of the heating elements and thermostats.
Verificare lefficienza della valvola di sicurezza e lassenza di perdite dai raccordi e dalle
guarnizioni di tenuta.
Check the efficiency of the safety valve and there are not leaks from the connections and the
gaskets.
0 0 0 0 0 TOLERANCES FOLLOWING ISO 8015
INDICATIONS FOR DIMENSIONS WITHOUT INDIVIDUAL
0 0 0 0 0 TOLERANCE INDICATIONS ISO 2768-mH
THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI Nominal dimensions (mm)
0 0 0 0 0
S.p.A. (THE COMPANY). 0.5 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000
WITHOUT ANY PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE COMPANY THIS to to to to to to to to
0 0 0 0 0 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
DRAWING CANNOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION, NEITHER TRANSFERRED
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.5 + 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
REV. DATE DES. CHK. REVISION DESCRIPTION - - - - - - - -
THE COMPANY WILL LEGALLY DEFEND ITS OWN RIGHTS.
GROUP
MACHINE
FO
DESCRIPTION
Classe di appartenenza :
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
ATTACCO SONDE VALIDAZIONE DN35

Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
8
6
8
7
4
5
2
Chk
Des.
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Scale
10
1:1
fag
*
*
*
*
*
23/04/2004
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
PP600579
PP100897
CC050092
CC050150
PM102466
PM200429
PM102467
PM102394
PM102685
GM100094
DWG. NO.
*KK 00 0318
000 00
00
000 01
000 02
00
00
01
000 00
000 03
00
GM101234
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
9
10
R
R
POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG REV QTY SPA
THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI 0 0 0 0 0 TOLERANCE INDICATIONS ISO 2768-mH
S.p.A. (THE COMPANY).
Nominal dimensions (mm)
WITHOUT ANY PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE COMPANY THIS 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000
DRAWING CANNOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION, NEITHER TRANSFERRED to to to to to to
to to
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. 0 0 0 0 0 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
REVISION DESCRIPTION - - - - - 0.5 - -
12
6
18
19
19
3
20
9
7
20
11
2
10
5
15
16
GROUP
14
1
13
DESCRIPTION
MACHINE FVG3
Classe di appartenenza : studi_temp
*KK000281
RUBINETTO IN FACCIATA FVG3

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
17
Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
*
*
Chk
Des.
Scale
0
1:2
CJ070047
PP151196
PP151200
PP206064
PP805801
PP100424
CA031211
CA191041
CA102051
CA191061
CA103071
CA021282
CB020030
CA181061
CA021301
CC050147
PM150012
PM150016
mis
GM802390
GM100017
13/07/2004
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
DWG. NO.
000 05
01
01
000 02
00
00
00
000 00
000 00
000 03
000 00
000 00
000 00
000 00
00
00
000 01
00
00
000 00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
R
R
GM150174
TOLERANCES FOLLOWING ISO 8015
TOLERANCE INDICATIONS ISO 2768-mH
S.p.A. (THE COMPANY). 0.5 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000
DRAWING CANNOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION, NEITHER TRANSFERRED 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
GROUP
MACHINE
FVG
DESCRIPTION
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
RITEGNO 1/2" GENERATORE FVG

*KK000255
1
Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chk
*
Des.
*
*
Scale
6
1:1
fag
25/05/2004
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
PP650044
CC150049
PM350268
PM350269
GM350183
GM350077
3
DWG. NO.
5
01
01
02
000 02
000 01
04
1
1
1
1
1
1
GM350255
2

0 0 0 0 0
S.p.A. (THE COMPANY). 0.5 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000
0 0 0 0 0 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
GROUP
MACHINE
FO
DESCRIPTION
RITEGNO DN10 FLANGIATO

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
*KK000255
1
Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chk
*
Des.
*
*
Scale
6
1:1
fag
12/03/2004
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
PP650044
CC150049
PM350253
GM350229
GM350183
GM350077
3
DWG. NO.
5
00
00
02
000 02
000 01
04
1
1
1
1
1
1
GM350240
2

to to
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. 01 06/05/05 EML FAF 0 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
7
8
3
5
2
4
6
8
13
Orientare in base alla

versione di autoclave
9
6
2
7
3
1
6
8
7
14
13
11
12
11
10
GROUP
versione di autoclave
DESCRIPTION
MACHINE FVG-2
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
GRP CARICO ARIA-VAP.-V.S.GENERATORE

GRP395
Status
Material
*KK000281
Treatments
Surface finish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
2
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
2
1
2
1
Chk
Des.
Scale
POS QTY
*
*
0
sat
1:2.5
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
06/05/2005
DWG. NO.
CJ060386
CJ000100
PP805810
PP100424
CB020146
gm100017
CB020030
CC050147
CD020081
PM102761
GM802421
GM802696
GM802610
GM101256
R
R
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
GM250481
0 0 0 0 0
S.p.A. (THE COMPANY). 0.5 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000
01 14/10/2004 MIS 0 AGGIORNAMENTO DISTINTA 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
GROUP
MACHINE
DESCRIPTION
4
FVG 1-2-3
GRP367
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
KIT KG66
BIDONE POMPA ACQUA POMPA FVG (KG66)

Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
1
2
3
4
1
Chk
Des.
Scale
1
1
1
1
POS QTY
1:5
mis
*
17/07/2004
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
DWG. NO.
PP830013
CD340115
PM801421
GM802616
2
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
GM250478
3
to to
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. 01 11/11/2004 MIS 0 MODIFICATO SECONDO RICHIESTE OFFICINA 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
12
11
13
10
14
1
CV14
2
GROUP
3
DESCRIPTION
2
MACHINE FVG 1-2

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
9
8
7
2
4
5
6
Classe di appartenenza : GRP DISTRIBUTORI

CR001
GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA "KG41" FVG1-2

R005
Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Chk
Des.
Scale
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
4
POS QTY
0
1:2
pib
*
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
19/11/2003
DWG. NO.
GRP366
CJ080026
CF040012
PP206082
PP805801
CB020112
CB020147
CB020130
CB080002
CB020137
CB020037
CA181071
CA102071
CA011791
CC110007
KG40 FVG1-2
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
GM250477
to to
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
10
12
11
1
13
14
GROUP
CV14
DESCRIPTION
MACHINE FVG3
2
3
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
R005
2

CR001
GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA "KG41" x FVG3

AL 'B001'
9
Status
Material
8
7
2
4
5
6
Treatments
Surface finish
Chk
Des.
Scale
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0
1:2
pib
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
4
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
10/05/2005
POS QTY
*
DWG. NO.
CJ080026
CF040012
PP206086
PP805801
CB020112
CB020147
CB020130
CB080002
CB020137
CB020037
CA181071
CA102071
CA011791
CC110007
GRP365
KG41 FVG3
GM250476
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
11 12
15 6
7
10 8
4000
2000
+ 2
to
6
-
+ 1.2
2000
1000
to
7
- 0.8
1000
400
to
13
- 0.5
400
120
to
8
+ 0.3
120
30
to
-
+ 0.2
30
to
6
-
+ 0.1
to
6
3
-
+ 0.1
0.5
to
3
15 14

versione di autoclave 9
REVISION DESCRIPTION
5
16
7 Orientare in base alla
versione di autoclave 16 GM802610 01 1
6 15
14
CD020081
CB020030
000 00
00
2
1
13 CJ000098 00 1
8
0
0
0
0
12 GM101256 02 1
11 CJ000100 00 1
8 10 PM102761 00 1
CHK.
9 GM802437 02 1
0
0
0
7 8
* GM100017 000 03 5 R
DES.
*
0
0
0
7 CC050147 00 5
6 6 PP100424 000 05 5 R
DATE
5 CJ060365 00 1
0
0
0
0
2 1 4 PP805801 00 1
GRP364
REV.
3 PP805810 1
0
0
0
0
2 2 CB020146 000 00 2
3 1 GM802421 02 1
THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI
WITHOUT ANY PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE COMPANY THIS
*KK000281 POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG REV QTY SPA

4
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED.
7 Classe di appartenenza :
Material Scale
MACHINE FVG-3 1:2.5
8 GROUP IMPIANTO IDRAULICO Status Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
6
19/11/2003
DESCRIPTION Surface finish Des. DWG. NO.
GRP CARICO ARIA-VAP.-V.S.GENERATORE mis
Treatments Chk
0
GM250475
to to
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
12
10
11
1
13
2
CV14
GROUP
DESCRIPTION
3
AL 'B001'
9
MACHINE FVG 1-2

CR001
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA FVG1-2

8
4
6
R005
Status
Material
Treatments
Surface finish
Chk
Des.
Scale
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
0
1:2
mis
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
19/11/2003
POS QTY
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
*
DWG. NO.
GRP361
CJ080026
PP206082
CF040013
PP805801
CB020112
CB020130
CB080002
CB020137
CB020037
CA181071
CA102071
CA011501
CC110007
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
FVG 1-2 STANDARD
GM250472
to to
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. 01 08/11/2004 MIS 0 MODFICATO SECONDO RICHIESTE OFFICINA 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
9
11
12
13
CV14
10
GROUP
2
DESCRIPTION
MACHINE FVG3
CR001
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA FVG3

8
AL 'B001'
7
Status
3
6
2
5
Material
R005
Treatments
Surface finish
Chk
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Des.
10
11
12
13
Scale
0
1:2
mis
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
4
4
POS QTY
19/11/2003
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
*
DWG. NO.
GRP360
CJ080026
CF040013
PP206086
PP805801
CB020112
CB020130
CB080002
CB020137
CB020037
CA181071
CA102071
CA011501
CC110007
FVG3 STANDARD
DWG.NO/CODE SPA
GM250471
to to
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED. 01 15/11/2004 mis 0 MODIFICATA POSIZIONE RUBINETTO SCARICO 3 6 30 120 400 1000 2000 4000
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
2
4
11
9
7
11
ALLO SCARICO
E006
8
4
SCARICO
3
2
VM7
1
2
R002
3
3
2
GROUP
5
DESCRIPTION
4
MACHINE FVG 1-2-3

6
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
GRUPPO SCARICO CAMERA FVG

5
*KK000281
DALLA
Status
Material
CAMERA
Treatments
Surface finish
GRP256 FVG 1-2-3
4
E007
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
11
10
Chk
Des.
Scale
ALLO SCARICO
1
5
5
5
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
0
POS QTY
mis
1:1.5
19/11/2003
*
*
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
*
2
7
DWG. NO.
3
CJ000099
CJ070001
CJ000100
PP100424
gm100017
CC050147
CD020081
GM350240
GM802404
PM102761
PM102762
DWG.NO/CODE
R
SPA
GM250467
to to
REV. DATE DES. CHK. + 0.1 + 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + +
- 0.8 + 1.2 + 2
5
10
4
9
P006
A
13
11
CR002
7
6
8
B001
1
12
12
GROUP
DESCRIPTION
MACHINE FVG 2-3
AL W001
GRP352
IMPIANTO IDRAULICO
*KK000281
MONTAGGIO SERBATOIO ARIA COMPRESSA

M014
Status
Material
Dal CV14
Treatments
Surface finish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Chk
*
Des.
Scale
A (1 : 1)
0
1:2
mis
Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
19/11/2003
COLLEGAMENTI
GL500205
* PP100424
CB020030
CB020036
CB020124
CA011501
CB100022
CD240042
CH010039
CC050147
PM102760
GM802406
GM100017
DWG. NO.
000 00
00
000 05
00
00
000 00
000 00
000 00
00
01
00
000 03
01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
GM250463
R
R
R

Alla E012-E013
A DAL RITEGNO 'R001' AL 'E012-E013'
B DAL GRP 'E012-E013' AL GRUPPO PRESSOSTATI
C ALLA GUARNIZIONE PORTE
26
6 D
4000
2000
+ 2
SCARICO SOVRAPRESSIONE POMPA

to
-
+ 1.2
2000
1000
to
E COLLEGARE AL DISPOSITIVO DI SICUREZZA PORTE

- 0.8
1000
400
to
P001 24
- 0.5
400
120
to
9
+
B
+ 0.3
120
30
to
1
-
+ 0.2
22
30
to
6
3
+ 0.1
to
6
3
5 26 4 CA240501
+ 0.1
0.5
to
3
25 2 CA051521
E012 24 2 CA461071
21 E013 26
18 A 23
22
2
4
CA181061
CA011501
17 B C 21 2 CA051481
MODIFICATO SECONDO RICHIESTE OFFICINA
7 20 2 CA461061
20 19 2 CA051581
25
19 PA01 18 1 CA051411
M002
REVISION DESCRIPTION
2 CARICO ACQUA 17 1 CC050008

13 DAL SERBATOIO 16 1 PP805801
B002 15 1 GM802608
12 14 1 CB020146
14 13 1 PM100118
9 12 1 PM801417
P002 D
E 11 2 CB020085
CARICO DAL
0
0
0
15 23 10 1 CJ080010 R
SERBATOIO P003 9 4 CB020062
B001 22 8 1 CC120034 R
CHK.
9
0
0
0
VR01 7 1 CA490031
4
DES.
MIS
6 1 CD230037 R
0
0
0
5 1 CD120040
01 08/11/2004
COLLEGARE
DATE
16 4 1 CB020032
0
0
0
AL GENERATORE 3 1 GM802607
DI VAPORE
REV.
0
0
0
2 1 GM802466
11
1 1 PP206193
THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI
WITHOUT ANY PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE COMPANY THIS
R001
POS QTY * DWG.NO/CODE SPA
TO ANY THIRD PARTY OR EVEN PARTIALLY REPRODUCED.
10
11 MACHINE FVG Material Scale
1:2
A GROUP MONTAGGI Status Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
18/05/2004
DESCRIPTION Surface finish Des. DWG. NO.
GM802571
PIASTRA COMPONENTI FVG fag
Treatments Chk
0
SECTION 6 COMPONENT DATA SHEETS
SECTION 6
COMPONENT DATA SHEETS
ID no. 84507 Rev. 2 1/3 July 2005

SCHEDA CODICE
TECNICA SIMBOLO DESCRIZIONE CODE
COMPONENT SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ASSIEME COMPONENTE
DATA SHEET ASSEMBLY COMPONENT
STC0001 T001 Pt100 flessibile / Flexible Pt100 PM600045
STC0026 M001 Manometro / Pressure gauge CH010052
STC0026 M014 Manometro/ Pressure gauge CH010039
STC0030 P002 Pressostato / Pressure switch GM802571 CD240004
STC0030 P003 Pressostato / Pressure switch GM802571 CD240005
STC0045 Z001 Micro / Microswitch GF170172 CD200033
STC0048 P005 Pressostato / Pressure switch GP400198 CD200026
STC0093 VM6 Valvola manuale / Manual valve GM802415 CJ070001
STC0093 VM7 Valvola manuale / Manual valve GM250467 CJ070001
STC0097 F007 Filtro aria sterile / Sterile air filter CC120035
STC0107 E012 Elettrovalvola aria / Electric valve for air GM802571 CJ000015
STC0109 VR01 Filtro ridutt. Aria / Air reduction unit filter GM802571 CC120034
STC0138 - Stampante termica / Thermal printer CE020017
STC0153 T003 Termostato / Thermostat CD220008
STC0157 R005 Valvola di ritegno / Check valve GM250472 CJ080026
STC0157 R006 Valvola di ritegno / Check valve CJ080026
STC0216 P006 Pressostato / Pressure switch CD240042
STC0237 VM Valvola manuale / Manual valve GM150174 CJ070047
STC0244 CR001 Rubinetto / Tap GM250463 CB020137
STC0309 P004 Pressostato / Pressure switch CD240057
STC0362 Y001 Valvola di sicurezza / Safety valve CJ060366
STC0362 Y002 Valvola di sicurezza / Safety valve GM250481 CJ060365
STC0363 CV14 Elettrocompressore / Electric compressor GM250472 CF040013
STC0364 CV14 Elettrocompressore / Electric compressor GM250477 CF040012
ID no. 84507 Rev. 2 2/3 July 2005

SCHEDA CODICE
TECNICA SIMBOLO DESCRIZIONE CODE
COMPONENT SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ASSIEME COMPONENTE
DATA SHEET ASSEMBLY COMPONENT
STC0365 E014 Elettrovalvola aria / Electric valve for air CJ000100
STC0367 F008 Filtro aria sterile / Sterile air filter CC120130
STC0368 L005 Livello elettronico / Electronic level GM250478 CD340115
STC0369 W002 Radiatore a ventola / Fan radiator CJ090081
STC0370 PV01 Pompa per vuoto / Vacuum pump GM802652 CF030191
STC0371 Z003 Proximity / Proximity sensor GU020200 CD200053
STC0371 Z004 Proximity / Proximity sensor GU020200 CD200053
STC0372 CR002 Rubinetto / Tap GM250463 CB100022
STC0373 R004 Valvola di ritegno / Check valve GM802571 CJ080039
STC0374 L004 Livello a galleggiante / Float level CB100021
STC0375 W001 Scambiatore / Exchanger GL400649
STC0376 P001 Trasduttore / Transducer GM802571 CD230037
STC0378 L003 Livello elettronico / Electronic level CD050012
STC0379 PA01 Motopompa / Motorized pump GM802466 CF030176
STC0380 B003 Contenitore in plastica / Plastic container GM250478 CK070015
STC0381 RX02 Resistenza / Resistor GM550096
STC0394 R001 Valvola di ritegno / Check valve CJ080042
STC0408 ME15 Motore elettrico / Electrical motor GU020200 CF020026
STC0409 W001 Scambiatore / Exchanger GL400658
ID no. 84507 Rev. 2 3/3 July 2005

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0001
COMPONENT DATA SHEET DOCS Open # 50814
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1
COMPONENTE / COMPONENT CODICE / CODE

Termoresistenze Pt100
PM600045
Pt100 thermoresistance
MODELLO / TYPE COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER
Esecuzione secondo disegno FEDEGARI
FASINTERNATIONAL S.r.l.
Execution according to FEDEGARI drawing
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
S Classe di precisione . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 DIN a 0_C (0.10_C + 0.0017/T) per T --65...+250_C

S Coefficiente temperatura . . . 3.850 x 10--3 x _C--1
S Elemento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pt100 Ohm a supporto ceramico
S Guaina di protezione . . . . . . . . . AISI 316 isolamento ceramico
S Cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 conduttori 30 AWG Cu/Ag isolati in teflon Fep e PTFE
S Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000 mm
S Tempo di risposta in
acqua a 0.2 m/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 4.5 sec. a 63.2% FS
S Autoriscaldamento . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 0.05_C con corrente di misura 10 mA
S Limiti di temperatura . . . . . . . . . --80...+250_C (riferiti a PTFE)
S Prova di pressione . . . . . . . . . . . . variazioni inferiori a 0.05_C per pressione sino a 3.5 MPa
S Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 MPa
S Class accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 DIN a 0_C (0.10_C + 0.0017/T) per T --65...+250_C

S Temperature coefficient . . . . . . . . 3.850 x 10 --3 x _C --1
S Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pt100 Ohm ceramic support
S Protective sheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AISI 316 -- ceramic insulating
S Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 conductor 30 AWG Cu/Ag -- teflon Fep and PTFE insulation
S Cable lenght . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000 mm
S Response time in water
at 0.2 m/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 4.5 sec. at 63.2% FS
S Auto--heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 0.05_C with 10 mA measure current
S Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --80...+250_C (PTFE)
S Pressure test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inferior variation at 0.05_C for 3.5 MPa pressure
S Max pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 MPa
DIMENSIONI / DIMENSIONS (mm)
COLLEGAMENTO
SONDA 4 FILI
4 WIRE PROBE
CONNECTION
76
ROSSO/RED
ROSSO/RED
40
4.5
BIANCO/WHITE 7 4.8
BIANCO/WHITE
COMPONENT DATA SHEET ID no. 50814
Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1

Manometro CH010001
Pressure gauge CH010038
CH010039
MODELLO / TYPE COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER CH010052
CH010053
TE.MA. s.r.l.
Scala
Codice Scale
Code colore nero colore rosso
black color red color
CH010001 02.5 bar 030 psi
CH010038 012 bar ----------
CH010039 01 MPa 010 bar
CH010052 --51 bar ----------
CH010053 --16 bar ----------
Raccordo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8
25
40
Rev. 4 -- Page 1/1
Pressostato CD240005 CD240049

Pressure switch CD240004 CD240051
CD240031

PS3--AF...--HMR ALCO CONTROLS
Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4

Pressione di prova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 bar Test pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 bar
Protezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP65 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP65
Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --30...+70_C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --30...+70_C
Materiale diaframma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bronzo Diaphragm material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bronze
Il modello PS3--WF1--HMR approvato TV TV approved version for PS3--WF1--HMR

in accordo alla DIN 32733 according to DIN 32733
Codice Modello Taratura

Code Type Setting
[bar]
CD240005 PS3--WF1--HMR 0.81.1

CD240004 PS3--WF1--HMR 2.73
CD240031 PS3--AF3--HMR 44.3
CD240049 PS3--AF3--HMR 55.3
CD240051 PS3--AF3--HMR 55.5
Connettore CD020081
Connection
28
75
20
35
20
39
48
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1
Microinterruttore di posizione
CD200033
Position switch
MP320--WSI 1MS27/375/200 SI MICROPRECISION
Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 mm Cable lenght . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 mm

Protezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP67 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP67
Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . --40...+130_C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . --40...+130_C
Forza di azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,5 N Actuating force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,5 N
Materiali Material
Cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone

Corpo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . poliestere Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polyester
Membrana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone Membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone

Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Microinterruttore di posizione
Position switch CD200026

MP720--WSI--1G/42 SI MICROPRECISION
Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 mm Cable lenght . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 mm

Protezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP67 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP67
Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . --20...+130_C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . --20...+130_C
Forza di azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 N Actuating force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 N
Materiali Material
Cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone

Corpo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polestere Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polyester
Membrana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone Membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone

Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1
Valvola a sfera CJ070001

Ball valve
446 MARIANI -- fluid control --
Pressione nominale . . . . . . . . . . . 40 bar Nominal pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 40 bar

Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4
Materiali Material
Guarnizione sfera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFE Ball gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFE

Guarnizione albero . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFE Shaft gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFE
Corpo, sfera e albero . . . . . . . . . ottone cromato Body, ball and shaft . . . . . . brass -- chrome plated
90
41
9
1/4
46
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Cartuccia filtro CC120035
Filter cartridge

KA1V002PV3 PALL Process Filtration Limited
Tipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMFLON II S Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMFLON II

Materiale Setto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVDF S Membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVDF
Materiale strati di supporto . . . . Polipropilene S Support and drainage layers . . . . . . . . . Polypropylene
Materiale gabbia esterna . . . . . . . . . Polipropilene S Cage, end cap and core . . . . . . . . . . . . Polypropylene
Guarnizione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPDM S O--ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPDM
Potere di ritenzione assoluto . . . 0,2 m S Absolute removal rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,2 m
Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 bar S Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 bar
Superficie filtrante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,05 m2 S Filtering area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,05 m2
Challeng Batterica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107/cm2 S Bacterial Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107/cm2
Brevundimonas Brevundimonas
diminuta diminuta
Sterilizzabile in autoclave a . . . . . . 140_ _C Steam sterilized in autoclave at . . . . 140_C
Massima Pressione Differenziale

Maximum Differential Pressure
Temperatura Flusso Diretto
Temperature Forward Direction
[C] [bar]
40 3.5
1/4 NPT
141
31.8
Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1

Elettorvalvola 5 vie
5--way solenoid valve CJ000015

SYJ3243--5LOU SMC
Pressione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 bar Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 bar

Azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . elettrico Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electrical
Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Vcc Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Vcc
Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . 0...50_C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 0...50_C
Materiali Material
Corpo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . alluminio anodizzato Body ....................... anodized alluminium
CJ000016
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Filtro--riduttore di pressione
Filter--pressure regulator CC120034

EAW100--M5 SMC
Connessioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M5
Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar Max input pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar
Pressione duscita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.57 bar Output pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.57 bar
Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5...50_C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 5...50_C
Materiali Material
Corpo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nylon 6 rinforzato Body ....................... Nylon 6 reinforced with

fibra di vetro glass fibre
Serbatoio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Poliammide Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyamide
Grado di filtrazione . . . 5 m Filtration grade . . . . . . . . . 5 m
26 25 40
25 38
50.5
30
109.5
28
25
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Stampante
Printer CE020017

FT190--S3 CUSTOM
Metodo di stampa . . . . . . . . termica a matrice di punti Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thermal dot matrix
Buffer di stampa . . . . . . . . . 1 Kbyte Print buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Kbyte
Modo di scrittura . . . . . . . . . diritto e rovesciato Print direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ormal or reverse
Interfaccie standard . . . . . RS232 o Standard interfaces . . . . . . . . . . RS232 or
Centronics Centronics
Dim. rotolo carta . . . . . . . . . . 58 1mm x 50 mm max Paper roll dimensions . . . . . . . 58 1mm x
Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . doppia o singola 50mm max
5 Vcc 10% Power supply .................. double or single
Temp. di funz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 +50 0C 5 Vdc. 10%
Operating temperature . . . . . 0 +50 0C
119 45.5 65
54.5 5.5
3.5
119
112
3.5
55
Stampante termica da pannello
FT190SP
Manuale utente
www.custom.it FT190SP
Parti della stampante
1- Meccanismo di stampa
2- Telaio
3- Bocca uscita carta
4- Etichetta caricamento carta
5- Pannello frontale
6- Vano rotolo carta
7- Consolle
8- Connettore di alimentazione
9- Connettore avvolgicarta
10- Connettore interfaccia
11- Connettore tasto Print esterno
FT190SP
Tutti i diritti riservati. vietata la riproduzione totale o parziale del presente manua-
le in qualsiasi forma, sia essa cartacea o informatica. La Custom Engineering s.r.l.
e le risorse impiegate nella realizzazione del manuale, non si assumono nessuna
responsabilit derivante dallutilizzo dello stesso, garantendo che le informazioni
contenute nel manuale sono state accuratamente verificate.
Ogni suggerimento riguardo ad eventuali errori riscontrati o a possibili migliora-
menti sar particolarmente apprezzato. I prodotti sono soggetti ad un continuo
controllo e miglioramento, pertanto la Custom Engineering s.r.l. si riserva di mo-
dificare le informazioni contenute nel manuale senza preavviso.
COD. DOMI - FT190SP REV. 1.20
Copyright 1998 Custom Engineering s.r.l. Italy
Custom Engineering
Str. Berettine 2 - 43010 Fontevivo (PARMA) - Italy
Tel. : +39 0521-680111 - Fax : +39 0521-610701
http: www.custom.it Email : support@custom.it
FT190SP
Dichiarazione "CE" di conformit
Rispetto alle norme ISO/IEC Guida 22 e EN 45014 N:
DC0302698
Nome del produttore: Custom Engineering s.r.l.
Indirizzo del Strada Berettine 2
produttore: Fontevivo (Parma)
Italy
Dichiara il prodotto:
Nome prodotto: Stampante da pannello con meccanismo di stampa
termico
Nome tipo: FT190SP
Modello: FT190SP RS232 / CENTRONICS
conforme alle seguenti direttive:
Direttiva Compatibilit Elettromagnetica 89/336/CEE; 92/31/CEE; 93/68/CEE
In accordo con i seguenti standard:
EN 55022 Limiti e metodi di misura delle 1995
Classe B caratteristiche di radiodisturbo
prodotto dagli apparecchi per la
tecnologia dell'informazione.
EN 50082-1 Compatibilit Elettromagnetica - 1992
Norma generica sull'immunit. Parte 2:
Ambiente industriale.
EN 61000-4-2 Prove di immunit a scariche 1995
elettrostatiche.
4KV a contatto, 8KV in aria
EN 61000-4-4 Prove di immunit a transitori/treni 1995
elettrici veloci.
Linee di alimentazione DC 0,5KV
ENV 50140 Campi elettromagnetici irradiati a 1993
radiofrequenza. Prova di immunit.
3V/m, 80MHz-1000MHz, 80% 1KHz
AM
Giugno 1998
FT190SP
SOMMARIO
INTRODUZIONE
CONTENUTO DEL MANUALE ........................................................................ 1

CONVENZIONI UTILIZZATE NEL MANUALE ................................................. 1
INFORMAZIONI GENERALI SULLA SICUREZZA ........................................... 1
DISIMBALLO DELLA STAMPANTE ................................................................. 3
CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI ..................................................................... 3
DESCRIZIONE DELLA STAMPANTE .............................................................. 4
1. INSTALLAZIONE ED UTILIZZO
1.1 CONNESSIONI ....................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Alimentazione ................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Avvolgicarta ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Pulsante Print esterno ....................................................................... 1-2
1.2 CONFIGURAZIONE ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3 AUTOTEST ............................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP ........................................................................... 1-3
1.5 MANUTENZIONE ................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1 Cambio rotolo carta .......................................................................... 1-4
2. INTERFACCE
2.1 SERIALE RS232 ..................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 PARALLELA CENTRONICS ................................................................. 2-3
2.3 OROLOGIO CALENDARIO (OPZIONE) ............................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Regolazione dellorologio mediante tastiera....................................... 2-4
3. FUNZIONI DELLA STAMPANTE
3.1 MODI DI SCRITTURA ............................................................................ 3-1

3.2 CARATTERI DI CONTROLLO ................................................................ 3-2
4. SPECIFICHE TECNICHE
4.1 SPECIFICHE TECNICHE ....................................................................... 4-1

4.2 DIMENSIONI .......................................................................................... 4-2
i FT190SP
SOMMARIO
5. SERIE DI CARATTERI
5.1 SET DI CARATTERI................................................................................ 5-1
APPENDICE A - ACCESSORI E RICAMBI
A.1 ACCESSORI ......................................................................................... A-1

A.1.1 Alimentatore .................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Avvolgicarta ..................................................................................... A-2
A.2 RICAMBI ............................................................................................... A-3
FT190SP ii
INTRODUZIONE
CONTENUTO DEL MANUALE
Oltre allIntroduzione, in cui sono riportate: le convenzioni utilizzate nel ma-

nuale, le informazioni generali sulla sicurezza, le modalit di disimballo della
stampante e una breve descrizione della stessa con le caratteristiche princi-
pali, il manuale organizzato nei seguenti capitoli:
Capitolo 1: Contiene le informazioni necessarie per installare correttamente
la stampante ed usarla in modo adeguato
Capitolo 2: Contiene le specifiche delle interfacce
Capitolo 3: Contiene la descrizione del set di comandi della stampante
Capitolo 4: Contiene le Specifiche tecniche della stampante
Capitolo 5: Contiene le serie di caratteri (font) utilizzati dalla stampante
CONVENZIONI UTILIZZATE NEL MANUALE
NOTA
Riporta delle informazioni o suggerimenti importanti per lutilizzo del-
la stampante
ATTENZIONE
Le informazioni contraddistinte da questo simbolo, devono essere
eseguite attentamente per non danneggiare la stampante
PERICOLO
Le informazioni contraddistinte da questo simbolo, devono essere
eseguite attentamente per non causare danni o lesioni alloperatore.
INFORMAZIONI GENERALI SULLA SICUREZZA
Leggete e conservate le istruzioni seguenti.

Seguite tutti gli avvisi e le istruzioni indicate sulla stampante.
Prima di pulire la stampante staccate il cavo di alimentazione.
Per pulire la stampante utilizzate un panno umido. Non usate prodotti liqui-
di o aerosol.
Non usate la stampante vicino allacqua.
1 FT190SP
INTRODUZIONE
Non collocate la stampante su una superficie instabile. Essa potrebbe ca-

dere e danneggiarsi seriamente.
Utilizzate il tipo di alimentazione elettrica indicato sulletichetta della stam-
pante. In caso di incertezza contattate il vostro rivenditore.
Collocate la stampante in modo da evitare che i cavi ad essa collegati pos-
sano essere danneggiati.
Assicuratevi che la corrente massima assorbita dalla stampante non supe-
ri la corrente massima ammessa dal tipo di cavo impiegato per lalimenta-
zione.
Non introducete oggetti allinterno della stampante in quanto essi possono
o cortocircuitare o danneggiare parti che potrebbero compromettere il fun-
zionamento della stampante.
Non versate liquidi sulla stampante
Non intervenite personalmente sulla stampante, eccetto che per le opera-
zioni di ordinaria manutenzione, espressamente riportate nel manuale
utente.
Staccate la stampante dalla linea di alimentazione e fatela riparare da un
tecnico specializzato, quando si verificano le condizioni seguenti:
A. Il connettore di alimentazione danneggiato.
B. entrato del liquido nella stampante;
C. La stampante stata esposta a pioggia o acqua;
D. La stampante non funziona normalmente pur avendo eseguito le
istruzioni riportate nel manuale duso.
E. La stampante caduta e il contenitore stato danneggiato.
F. La stampante presenta un sensibile calo nelle prestazioni.
G. La stampante non funziona.
FT190SP 2
INTRODUZIONE
DISIMBALLO DELLA STAMPANTE
Rimuovete la stampante dal cartone, facendo attenzione a non danneggiare

il materiale di imballaggio al fine di utilizzarlo per trasporti futuri
Assicuratevi che vi siano i componenti illustrati in seguito e che essi non sia-
no danneggiati. In caso contrario contattate il servizio di assistenza.
Stampante
Manuale (o Cdrom)
Rotolo di carta (allinterno della stampante)
Viti lunghe
(Fig.1)
NOTA
Per lutilizzo delle viti lunghe leggere la nota al paragrafo 4.2
CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI
La FT190SP una stampante che unisce ad un design innovativo, elevate pre-

stazioni, affidabilit e semplicit di utilizzo.
Per tali motivi essa costituisce una soluzione ottimale per tutte quelle appli-
cazioni industriali, professionali, da laboratorio, che necessitano di un riscon-
tro immediato dei dati su scontrino, tipici settori di applicazione sono: sistemi
di pesatura, scontrini non fiscali, sicurezza, controllo e diagnosi.
dotata di un meccanismo di stampa termico a 200 dpi, che utilizza carta di
57,5 mm di larghezza in rotolo. Pu stampare 24 o 40 caratteri per riga
selezionabile nel setup o con comando software.
La stampante FT190SP, per la sua compattezza e leggerezza, pu essere in-
stallata con estrema semplicit su qualunque tipo di apparecchiatura.
A bordo scheda vi sono gi presenti due interfacce: seriale RS232 e parallela
centronics. Per selezionare una delle due interfacce necessario spostare
alcuni jumper.
Il buffer di ricezione di 1 Kbytes. Pu essere inoltre dotata di orologio calenda-
rio (Real Time Clock).
3 FT190SP
INTRODUZIONE
DESCRIZIONE DELLA STAMPANTE
La stampante FT190SP costituita da un corpo in ABS (1) dotato di uno spor-

tello anteriore (2), attraverso il quale si accede al rotolo carta e al meccanismo
si stampa.
Frontalmente alloggiata la consolle (3), composta dai tasti PRINT, FEED e
dai due led luminosi: Power e Status.
(Fig.2)
Tasto PRINT. Quando viene azionato provoca sulla seriale la trasmissione

del carattere di controllo $0D solo se stato abilitato nel setup della
stampante. In parallelo al tasto PRINT vi il connettore J6 utilizzabile per la
connessione di un tasto esterno (fig.1.1).
Tasto FEED. Premuto permette lavanzamento manuale della carta. Se

premuto brevemente, qualora sia installata lopzione RTCK, provoca la
stampa dellora e della data.
Il led POWER indica la presenza dellalimentazione digitale della stam-

pante.
Il led di STATUS indica, se lampeggiante, che la carta finita. Se rimane

acceso fisso segnala la presenza di un errore (alimentazione testina
troppo bassa o troppo alta o temperatura testina troppo alta).
FT190SP 4
1.1 CONNESSIONI
(Fig.1.1)
1.1.1 Alimentazione
La stampante FT190SP dotata, per lalimentazione, di un connettore standard

tipo AMPMODU1 4 poli maschio (J4). I segnali sui pin del connettore di alimen-
tazione sono i seguenti:
ATTENZIONE
Rispettare le polarit dellalimentazione
VERSIONE 5V
PIN SEGNALE NOT E
1 GND
2 GND
3 +VT: da 4.5 Vdc a 7 Vdc (alimentazione testina)
4 +VCC: 5 Vdc 7% (alimentazione scheda logica)
(Tab.1.1)
1- 1 FT190SP
VERSIONE 9 - 40V
PIN SEGNALE NOT E
1 GND
2 GND
3 da 9 Vdc a 40 Vdc
4 N.C.
(Tab.1.2)
1.1.2 Avvolgicarta
Il connettore J5 (fig.1.1) viene utilizzato per alimentare lavvolgicarta esterno. La

posizione e la funzione dei segnali riportata in Tabella 1.3.
Pin Segnale
1 MOTORE +
2 MOTORE -
(Tab.1.3)
1.1.3 Pulsante Print esterno
Al connettore J6 (fig.1.1) pu essere collegato un tasto Print esterno. La polarit

e la funzione dei segnali riportata in Tabella 1.4.
Pin Segnale
1 PRINT
2 GND
(Tab.1.4)
1.2 CONFIGURAZIONE
La FT190SP permette la configurazione dei parametri di default della stampan-

te. Questa procedura viene attivata mantenendo premuti i tasti PRINT e FEED
allaccensione con il ponticello JP2 (Fig. 2.1) presente sulla scheda della stam-
pante aperto.
FT190SP 1- 2
Ad ogni successiva pressione del tasto PRINT si ottiene la variazione del

parametro e la stampa del valore corrente dello stesso. Ottenuto il valore
desiderato, premendo il tasto FEED si passa al parametro successivo, e
cos via. La stampa di un messaggio, quando sono scorsi tutti i parametri,
segnala il termine del settaggio.
I parametri influenzati nella configurazione sono:
Selezione del numero di colonne (24 o 40)

Modalit di scrittura (normal o reverse)
Selezione della dimensione del carattere (normale, doppia larghezza,
doppia altezza, espanso)
Selezione del font (font 1 o font 2)
Abilitazione o disabilitazione del comando CR
Abilitazione o disabilitazione AUTOFEED : se la funzione abilitata
quando la stampante riceve un numero di caratteri pari al buffer di linea
va a capo automaticamente
Selezione della velocit di stampa in funzione dellassorbimento
Selezione dellintensit di rosso : utilizzando carta termica bicolore
possibile impostare varie tonalit di rosso
Selezione dei parametri per la comunicazione seriale o parallela
Abilitazione o disabilitazione del buffer da 1Kbyte
Abilitazione settaggio real time clock
Abilitazione stampa dei secondi nelle funzioni del real time clock.
I settaggi eseguiti vengono salvati su EEPROM (memoria non volatile).
1.3 AUTOTEST
Lautotest si ottiene mantenendo premuto il tasto FEED allaccensione della

stampante. Lesecuzione dellautotest provoca la stampa dei dati di settaggio
correnti della stampante e la stampa del set di caratteri ASCII completo.
1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP
Se allaccensione viene premuto il tasti PRINT, la stampante entra nella mo-

dalit Hexadecimal Dump. Questa funzione viene utilizzata per diagnosticare
i caratteri ricevuti in seriale o in parallelo. Infatti vengono stampati come codi-
ce esadecimale ed il corrispettivo codice Ascii.
1- 3 FT190SP
1.5 MANUTENZIONE
1.5.1 Cambio rotolo carta
Per effettuare il cambio del rotolo carta procedere come segue:
1) Aprire lo sportello della stampante e premere sul supporto basculante del

meccanismo di stampa dove viene riportata la dicitura PUSH;
2) Inserire lestremit nellimboccatura del meccanismo di stampa e posizio-

nare il rotolo carta, rispettando il verso di rotazione indicato in figura;
3) Automaticamente la carta viene trascinata dal rullo per 3 o 4 centimetri;
4) Strappare la carta e richiudere lo sportello.
(Fig.1.2)
ATTENZIONE
Prima di inserire la carta assicurarsi
che il taglio sia regolare
FT190SP 1- 4
2. INTERFACCE
(Fig.2.1)
La selezione delle interfacce RS232 o CENTRONICS avviene mediante la strip

a 20 contatti:
posizionando la strip nella posizione 1-2 (fig.2.1) viene selezionata linterfaccia
Centronics standard, posizionando invece la strip nella posizione 2-3 viene
selezionata linterfaccia RS232.
2.1 SERIALE RS232
La stampante possiede uninterfaccia seriale RS232 ed collegata mediante un

connettore a vaschetta 25 poli femmina. Nel protocollo seriale, i segnali che
caratterizzano la comunicazione sono TXD, RXD e RTS se stato selezionato
il protocollo RTS/CTS, mentre se stato selezionato il protocollo XON/XOFF i
segnali sono TXD e RXD.
Nella seguente tabella sono indicati i segnali presenti sul connettore:
PIN SEGNALE DIREZIONE DESCRIZIONE

1 NC -
2 TXD Uscita Trasmissione dati
3 RXD Entrata Ricezione dati
4 RTS Uscita Uguale al segnale DTR
7 SG - Segnale Massa
2- 1 FT190SP
2. INTERFACCE
PIN SEGNALE DIREZIONE DESCRIZIONE

20
20 DTR Uscita Selezionando il comando DTR/DSR,
questo segnale indica quando la
stampante impegnata. SPACE indica
che la stampante pronta a ricevere dei
dati, e MARK indica che la stampante
impegnata.
23
23 GND - Massa
24
24 GND - Massa
25
25 GND - Massa
(Tab.2.1)
I seguenti schemi mostrano un esempio di collegamento tra la stampante ed il

Personal Computer mediante un connettore 25 e 9 poli femmina.
(Fig.2.2)
(Fig.2.3)
FT190SP 2- 2
2. INTERFACCE
2.2 PARALLELA CENTRONICS
La stampante ha uninterfaccia in parallelo Centronics ed collegata mediante

un connettore a vaschetta 25 poli femmina. Nella comunicazione parallela i se-
gnali utilizzabili sono:
1) data bus a 7 o 8 bit;

2) segnale di STROBE che indica la validit dei dati;
3) segnale di BUSY che indica la disponibilit della stampante a rice-
vere dati;
4) segnale di ACK di conferma lettura dati.
Nella seguente tabella sono indicati i segnali presenti sul connettore:

PIN SEGNALE DIREZIONE
1 Strobe Entrata
2 Data bit 0 Entrata
10
10 ACK Uscita
11
11 BUSY Uscita
12
12 PAPER END Uscita
13
13 HIGHT Uscita
14
14 NC -
15
15 FALT Uscita
16
16 RESET Entrata
17-25 GND -
(Tab.2.2)
2- 3 FT190SP
2. INTERFACCE
2.3 OROLOGIO CALENDARIO (opzione)
disponibile come opzione lorologio calendario (Real Time Clock).

La stampa e la regolazione dellorologio sono gestite attraverso una serie di
caratteri di controllo.
NOTA
Per i caratteri di controllo dellorologio vedere la descrizione del set di
comandi della stampante al capitolo 3.
2.3.1 Regolazione dellorologio mediante tastiera
possibile regolare lora e la data mediante i tasti PRINT e FEED presenti sul
pannello frontale della stampante. La procedura per il settaggio la seguente:
Mantenendo premuto il tasto FEED, premere il tasto PRINT. La stampante

stamper lora e la data con una freccia che indicher una cifra da variare;
Ad ogni pressione del tasto PRINT si otterr lincremento della cifra indica-
ta dalla freccia e la stampa aggiornata;
Per selezionare unaltra cifra da variare premere nuovamente il tasto
FEED. Ad ogni operazione la stampante stampa ora e data aggiornate,
evidenziando con la freccia la cifra in selezione;
Per terminare il settaggio, premere PRINT e FEED contemporaneamente.
FT190SP 2- 4
3.1 MODI DI SCRITTURA
La stampante FT190SP dispone di due modi di scrittura, selezionabili tramite

i caratteri di controllo:
normal e reverse.
(Fig.3.1)
3- 1 FT190SP
3.2 CARATTERI DI CONTROLLO
Nella tabella comandi, sono elencati tutti i comandi per la gestione delle fun-
zioni della stampante FT190SP. Questi comandi possono essere trasmessi
alla stampante con entrambe le interfacce, seriale o parallela; se per si utiliz-
za linterfaccia parallela lutente non potr ricevere alcun tipo di risposta, poi-
ch la suddetta interfaccia monodirezionale.
I comandi possono essere trasmessi alla stampante in qualsiasi momento,
ma verranno eseguiti solo quando i caratteri trasmessi precedentemente ver-
ranno stampati o i comandi precedenti eseguiti. Quindi non vi sono comandi
prioritari, ma tutti vengono eseguiti al momento in cui il buffer circolare li mette
a disposizione.
(Tab.3.1)
TABELLA COMANDI
C om. ASC II C om. H EX D escriz ione
$00 Scri ttura a caratteri pi ccoli
$01 Scri ttura a doppi a larghezza
$02 Scri ttura a doppi a altezza
$03 Scri ttura ti po espanso
$04 Ri pri sti na scri ttura a caratteri pi ccoli
$0A Esegue un li ne feed
(n) $0B Esegue (n) li ne feed
$0D Esegue la stampa del buffer di ri ga
$0F Setta i l modo C RLF
$11 Modo grafi co
$12 Stampa l'ora e la data
$13 Setta l'ora e la data
$14 Trasmette i n seri ale l'ora e la data
$17 Stampa i l 1 carattere programmabi le
$1A Stampa i l 4 carattere programmabi le
$1C Stampa i l 5 carattere programmabi le
$1D Stampa i l 6 carattere programmabi le
FT190SP 3- 2
Com. ASCII Com. HEX Descriz ione
$1E Stampa il 7 carattere programmabile
$1F Stampa il 8 carattere programmabile
ESC A $1B $41 Esegue l'avanzamento di [n] dot line
ESC R $1B $52 Setta la stampa in modo reverse
ESC N $1B $4E Setta la stampa in modo normal
ESC @ $1B $40 Resetta la stampante
ESC D $1B $44 Mette la data nel buffer di stampa
ESC T $1B $54 Mette l'ora nel buffer di stampa
Mette la data (mm :gg :aa) nel buffer di
ESC U $1B $55
stampa
ESC S $1B $53 Abilita la stampa dei secondi
ESC X $1B $58 Stampa in rosso
ESC x $1B $78 Stampa in nero
ESC B $1B $42 Setta il font 1
ESC b $1B $62 Setta il font 2
ESC I $1B $49 Seleziona 24 colonne
ESC i $1B $69 Seleziona 40 colonne
(aa) ESC r (aa) $1B $72 Legge all'indirizzo (aa) un dato
(aadd) $1B
(aadd) ESC w Scrive nell'indirizzo (aa) il dato (dd)
$77
(dd) ESC G (dd) $1B $47 Scrive il valore (dd) nel'option register
(dd) ESC K (dd) $1B $4B Scrive il valore (dd) nel'option register 1
(dd) ESC M (dd) $1B $4D Scrive il valore (dd) nel modo di stampa
ESC p $1B $70 Trasmette in seriale l'option register
ESC k $1B $6B Trasmette in seriale l'option register 1
ESC m $1B $6D Trasmette in seriale il modo di stampa
Trasmette in seriale il carattere
ESC s $1B $73
successivo
(dd) ESC a $1B $61 Seleziona il numero di dot space
ESC J (n) $1B $4A Carica il carattere programmabile
ESC W $1B $57 Stampa linea grafica a 200 dpi
ESC c $1B $63 Gestione della stampa dei bar code
ESC Q $1B $51 Attiva la sottolineatura
ESC q $1B $71 Disattiva la sottolineatura
3- 3 FT190SP
Alla tabella segue una descrizione pi articolata di ogni comando.
00H
[Nome] Scrittura a caratteri piccoli
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 00
Decimale 0
[Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato piccolo (normale)
[Note] I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa
I comandi che modificano la direzione dei caratteri sono
attivi solo a inizio riga
[Default] Impostazione nelloption register tramite i tasti frontali
[Riferimento] 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H
[Esempio]
01H
[Nome] Scrittura a doppia larghezza
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 01
Decimale 1
[Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato doppia larghezza
[Esempio]
02H
[Nome] Scrittura a doppia altezza
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 02
Decimale 2
[Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato doppia altezza
FT190SP 3- 4

[Esempio]
03H
[Nome] Scrittura tipo espanso
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 03
Decimale 3
[Descrizione] La stampa dei caratteri viene eseguita in modo espanso
I comandi che modificano la dimensione dei caratteri sono
[Esempio]
04H
[Nome] Ripristina scrittura a caratteri piccoli
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 04
Decimale 4
[Descrizione] Torna alla scrittura con caratteri piccoli
I comandi che modificano la dimensione dei caratteri sono
[Esempio]
3- 5 FT190SP
0AH
[Nome] Esegue un line feed
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 0A
Decimale 10
[Descrizione] Esegue un line feed equivalente a una linea di stampa
[Note] Questo comando provoca la stampa del contenuto del
buffer
[Default]
[Riferimento] 0BH
[Esempio]
(n) 0BH
[Nome] Esegue (n) line feed
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 0B
Decimale 11
[Descrizione] Esegue tanti line feed quanti ne sono specificati nel numero
n
[Note] Il numero n deve essere ASCII e compreso fra 0 e 9 (quan-
do n=0 il comando nullo)
Questo comando cancella il buffer di linea
[Default]
[Riferimento] 0AH
[Esempio] Se si vuole un avanzamento veloce di 5 line feed:
$35 $0B (ovvero 5 e il comando $0B)
0DH
[Nome] Esegue la stampa del buffer di riga
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 0D
Decimale 13
[Descrizione] Questo comando provoca la stampa del buffer di riga
[Note] Se il buffer vuoto il comando risulta nullo
FT190SP 3- 6
Se settata lopzione CRLF, questo comando ignorato e

la stampa avviene solo tramite il comando $0A
[Default]
[Riferimento] 0FH
[Esempio]
0FH
[Nome] Setta il modo CRLF
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 0F
Decimale 15
[Descrizione] Inibisce il comando $0D mantenendo attivo per la stampa
solo il comando $0A
[Note] Per disabilitare questa opzione resettare la stampante
Questo comando cancella il buffer di linea
Allaccensione il valore di default nellOption Register
[Riferimento] 0DH
[Esempio]
11H
[Nome] Modo grafico
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 11
Decimale 17
[Descrizione] Abilita la modalit grafica:
una riga in modalit 24 colonne, corrisponde a 144 punti
orizzontali divisi in 24 blocchi di 6 punti; una riga in modalit
40 colonne corrisponde a 240 punti orizzontali divisi in 40
blocchi di 6 punti.
[Note] Per ottenere una stampa grafica inserire il comando $11
allinizio di ogni riga. Il formato del byte nella configurazione
grafica :
X R P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
3- 7 FT190SP
dove:
X non utilizzato (si consiglia 0);
R deve essere fisso a livello 1;
P1,.P6 sono i dati dei punti grafici (1 stampa, 0 non stampa).
Il bit P6 della stringa di punti trasmessa, viene stampato sulla
sinistra e gli altri a seguire (P5, P4, P3, P2, P1) verso destra
come raffigurato:
1 byte 2 byte 3 byte

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio] Per stampare una linea di punti occorre trasmettere:
$11, n x $7F (dove n il numero di caratteri per linea), $0D.
Per stampare una linea vuota occorre trasmettere:
$11, $40, $0D.
12H
[Nome] Stampa lora e la data
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 12
Decimale 18
[Descrizione] Esegue la stampa dellora e della data nel seguente formato:
hh : mm gg - mm - aa
Se abilitata la stampa dei secondi, il formato sar:
hh : mm : ss gg - mm - aa
[Note] Il comando determina il reset della linea
[Default]
[Riferimento] 13H, 14H
[Esempio]
13H
[Nome] Setta lora e la data
FT190SP 3- 8
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 13
Decimale 19
[Descrizione] Questo comando setta lora e la data in due modi possibili:
il primo setta le ore in 24h e il secondo in 12h antimeridiane o
postmeridiane. Nel primo modo si trasmettono 10 caratteri
ASCII dellora e la data seguiti da $13. Nel secondo modo si
trasmettono 10 caratteri ASCII dellora e la data preceduti da
A o P e seguiti da $13.
[Note] E consigliabile inviare prima un comando $0D per svuotare
il buffer di stampa
[Default]
[Esempio] Per settare le 12:45 del 19-01-93 occorre inviare:
1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13
$31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33 $13
Per settare le A12:45 del 19-01-93 occorre inviare:
A 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13
$41 $31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33 $13
14H
[Nome] Trasmette in seriale lora e la data
[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 14
Decimale 20
[Descrizione] Trasmette ora e data sulla porta seriale in formato di 11 carat-
teri ASCII: ora/minuti/giorno/mese/anno + (CR) $0D
[Note]
[Default]
[Esempio]
17H,...1FH
3- 9 FT190SP
[Nome] Stampa il 1 (...8) carattere programmabile

[Formato] ASCII -
Hex 17, ...1F
Decimale 23, ...31
[Descrizione] Questo comando provoca la stampa del carattere
programmabile corrispondente.
[Note]
[Default] BIT MAP contenuto in flash
[Riferimento] 17H, 18H, 19H, 1AH, 1CH, 1DH, 1EH, 1FH
[Esempio]
ESC A [nH] [nL]

[Nome] Esegue lavanzamento di [n] dot line
[Formato] ASCII ESC A nH nL
Hex 1B 41 nH nL
Decimale 27 65 nH nL
[Descrizione] Esegue lavanzamento di [n] dot line
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio]
ESC R
[Nome] Setta la stampante in modo reverse
[Formato] ASCII ESC R
Hex 1B 52
Decimale 27 82
[Descrizione] Seleziona la stampa nel modo reverse: lo scontrino esce
dalla stampante con le scritte diritte e da sinistra verso destra
[Note]
[Riferimento] ESC N
[Esempio]
FT190SP 3- 10
ESC N
[Nome] Setta la stampa in modo normal
[Formato] ASCII ESC N
Hex 1B 4E
Decimale 27 78
[Descrizione] Seleziona la stampa in modo normal: lo scontrino esce dalla
stampante con le scritte capovolte e da destra verso sinistra
[Note]
[Riferimento] ESC R
[Esempio]
ESC @
[Nome] Resetta la stampante
[Formato] ASCII ESC @
Hex 1B 40
Decimale 27 64
[Descrizione] Cancella tutti i dati nel buffer di stampa e resetta il modo della
stampante riportandolo a quello attivo al momento dellaccen-
sione
[Note] Uguale al reset hardware
Trasmesso il comando bisogna attendere 1,5 secondi pri-
ma di riavere la stampante attiva
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio] Puo essere utile allaccensione per evitare linvio di caratteri
fasulli durante linizializzazione da parte del dispositivo master
3- 11 FT190SP
ESC D
[Nome] Mette la data nel buffer di stampa
[Formato] ASCII ESC D
Hex 1B 44
Decimale 27 68
[Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer la data dellorologio calendario montato a
bordo della stampante: il formato gg - mm - aa.
[Note] La data viene stampata in 8 caratteri: nel caso non ci sia
abbastanza spazio nel buffer, essa non viene stampata
Non azzera il buffer di linea
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC T, ESC U
[Esempio] Se si vuole scrivere:
DATA: 11-09-93 TEST OK
si trametter DATA: $1b $44 TEST OK $0D
per stampare solo la data $1B $44 $0D
ESC T
[Nome] Mette lora nel buffer di stampa
[Formato] ASCII ESC T
Hex 1B 54
Decimale 27 84
[Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer lora dellorologio calendario montato a
bordo della stampante: il formato hh:mm
[Note] Lora viene stampata in 5 caratteri e, se sono abilitati i se-
condi, in 8 caratteri: nel caso non ci sia abbastanza spazio nel
buffer, essa non viene stampata
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC D, ESC U, ESC S
ORA: 16:45 TEST OK
si trametter ORA: $1b $54 TEST OK $0D
FT190SP 3- 12
ESC U
[Nome] Mette la data (mm - gg - aa) nel buffer di stampa
[Formato] ASCII ESC U
Hex 1B 55
Decimale 27 85
[Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer la data dellorologio calendario montato a
bordo della stampante in formato americano mm-gg-aa
[Note] La data viene stampata in 8 caratteri: nel caso non ci sia
abbastanza spazio nel buffer, essa non viene stampata
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC D, ESC T
DATA: 09-11-93 TEST OK
si trametter DATA: $1b $55 TEST OK $0D
ESC S
[Nome] Abilita la stampa dei secondi
[Formato] ASCII ESC S
Hex 1B 53
Decimale 27 83
[Descrizione] Abilita la stampa dei secondi quando si richiede lora col
comando ESC T
[Note]
[Riferimento] ESC T
[Esempio]
ESC X
[Nome] Stampa in rosso
[Formato] ASCII ESC X
Hex 1B 58
Decimale 27 88
[Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando la stampante si predi-
spone per la stampa in rosso
3- 13 FT190SP
[Note]
ESC x
[Nome] Stampa in nero
[Formato] ASCII ESC x
Hex 1B 78
Decimale 27 120
spone per la stampa in nero
[Note]
ESC B
[Nome] Setta il font 1
[Formato] ASCII ESC B
Hex 1B 42
Decimale 27 66
[Descrizione] Seleziona il primo font di caratteri
[Note] Il font completo stampato nellautotest. Alcuni codici non
sono standard: $60, $7B, $7C, $7D, $7E, $7F, $8D, $ED,
$FA, $FF
[Riferimento] ESC b
[Esempio]
ESC b
[Nome] Setta il font 2
[Formato] ASCII ESC b
Hex 1B 62
Decimale 27 98
[Descrizione] Seleziona il secondo font di caratteri
[Note] Il font completo stampato nellautotest. Il font contiene
caratteri cirillici
[Riferimento] ESC B
[Esempio]
FT190SP 3- 14
ESC I
[Nome] Seleziona 24 colonne
[Formato] ASCII ESC l
Hex 1B 49
Decimale 27 73

spone per la stampa a 24 colonne per riga
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC i
[Esempio]
ESC i
[Nome] Seleziona 40 colonne
[Formato] ASCII ESC i
Hex 1B 69
Decimale 27 105
spone per la stampa a 40 colonne per riga
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC l
[Esempio]
(aa) ESC r
[Nome] Legge allindirizzo (aa) un dato
[Formato] ASCII aH aL ESC r
Hex aH aL 1B 72
Decimale aH aL 27 114
[Descrizione] Legge una locazione di memoria (EEPROM) allindirizzo a:
aH il nibble pi significativo di a espresso in ASCII
aL il nibble meno significativo di a espresso in ASCII
[Note] Le locazioni leggibili sono 256 (dalla $00 alla $FF)
3- 15 FT190SP
[Default] Di default tutto il banco di memoria contiene il valore $20

[Riferimento] ESC w
[Esempio] Per leggere lindirizzo $01, bisogna trasmettere in ASCII:
$30 $31 $1B $72
Se lindirizzo $01 contiene $A5, riceveremo:
$41 $35
(aadd) ESC w
[Nome] Scrive nellindirizzo (aa) il dato (dd)
[Formato] ASCII aH aL dH dL ESC w
Hex aH aL dH dL 1B 77
Decimale aH aL dH dL 27 119
[Descrizione] Salva il dato d allindirizzo a in memoria (EEPROM):
aH il nibble pi significativo di a espresso in ASCII
aL il nibble meno significativo di a espresso in ASCII
dH il nibble pi significativo di d espresso in ASCII
dL il nibble meno significativo di d espresso in ASCII
[Note] Le locazioni scrivibili sono 256 (dalla $00 alla $FF), i dati
devono essere al massimo $FF (255) e, sia gli indirizzi che i
dati, devono essere espressi in ASCII su due bytes
[Default] Di default tutto il banco di memoria contiene il valore $20
[Riferimento] ESC r
[Esempio] Per salvare il dato $A5 nellindirizzo $01, si deve trasmettere:
$30 $31 $41 $35 $1B $77
(dd) ESC G
[Nome] Scrive il valore (dd) nelloption register
[Formato] ASCII dH dL ESC G
Hex dH dL 1B 47
Decimale dH dL 27 71
[Descrizione] Modifica il registro di configurazione. (dd) sono due caratteri
ASCII che rappresentano il codice esadecimale per la pro-
grammazione del registro.
(dd) bit=0 bit=1
bit0: settaggio del real time clock disabilitato abilitato
bit1: direzione di stampa normal reverse
bit2: numero bit in ricezione parallela 8 7
bit3: stampa dei secondi disabilitato abilitato
FT190SP 3- 16
bit4: CR ($0D) abilitato disabilitato

bit5: selezione parametri ricezione hardware software
(dipswitch)
bit6: selezione del font font 1 font 2
bit7: buffer di ricezione 1Kbyte N colonne
[Note] Limpostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM e assun-

to come default alla successiva accensione
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC K
[Esempio] Per inviare il byte di settaggio 00001001 ($09):
$30 $39 $1B $47
(dd) ESC K
[Nome] Scrive il valore (dd) nelloption register 1
[Formato] ASCII dH dL ESC K
Hex dH dL 1B 4B
[Descrizione] Modifica il registro di configurazione. (dd) sono due caratteri
ASCII che rappresentano il codice esadecimale per la pro-
grammazione del registro.
(dd) bit=0 bit=1
bit0: numero di colonne 24 colonne 40 colonne

[Note] Limpostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM quindi
verr assunto come default alla successiva accensione
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC G
[Esempio] Per inviare il byte di settaggio 00001001 ($09):
$30 $39 $1B $47
3- 17 FT190SP
(dd) ESC M
[Nome] Scrive il valore (dd) nel modo di stampa
[Formato] ASCII dH dL ESC M
Hex dH dL 1B 4D
[Descrizione] Setta i parametri di default del modo stampa:
$00 scrittura a caratteri piccoli
$01 scrittura a doppia larghezza
$02 scrittura a doppia altezza
$03 scrittura espansa
[Note] Limpostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM
[Default] Impostazione mediante tasti frontali
[Riferimento] ESC m
[Esempio] Per stampare a doppia altezza, si deve trasmettere:
$30 $32 $1B $4D
ESC p
[Nome] Trasmette in seriale il registro di configurazione
[Formato] ASCII ESC p
Hex 1B 70
Decimale 27 112
[Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale il byte delloption register
[Note] Se la stampante usa il protocollo parallelo, non verr tra-
smesso nulla
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC G, ESC K, ESC k
[Esempio] La risposta si ha su due bytes. Ad esempio, se si riceve:
$30 $39
vuol dire che la configurazione di default 00001001
ESC k
[Nome] Trasmette in seriale il secondo registro di configurazio-
ne
[Formato] ASCII ESC k
Hex 1B 6B
Decimale 27 107
[Descrizione] Trasmette in seriale il valore del secondo registro di configu-
razione in formato ASCII su due caratteri rappresentanti il
FT190SP 3- 18
valore esadecimale
smesso nulla
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC K
$30 $39
vuol dire che la configurazione di default 00001001
ESC m
[Nome] Trasmette in seriale il modo di stampa
[Formato] ASCII ESC m
Hex 1B 6D
Decimale 27 109
[Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale la configurazione del modo di stampa
smesso nulla
[Riferimento] ESC B
$30, $32
vuol dire che la stampa in doppia altezza
ESC s
[Nome] Trasmette in seriale il carattere successivo
[Formato] ASCII ESC s
Hex 1B 73
Decimale 27 115
[Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale il successivo carattere che ricever
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio] Se si trasmette: ESC s A
lultimo carattere, A, non verr stampato, ma verr immediata-
mente trasmesso sulla linea seriale
3- 19 FT190SP
(dd) ESC a
[Nome] Seleziona il numero di dot space
[Formato] ASCII (dd) ESC a
Hex (dd) 1B 61
Decimale (dd) 27 97
[Descrizione] (dd) sono due caratteri ASCII che identificano un byte
esadecimale e corrispondono al numero di dot line tra una
riga di stampa e laltra
[Note]
[Default] =0
[Riferimento]
[Esempio]
ESC J (n) 10*(d)

[Nome] Carica il carattere programmabile
[Formato] ASCII ESC J (n)
Hex 1B 4A (n)
Decimale 27 74 (n)
[Descrizione] (n) corrisponde al numero di carattere ovvero da 1 a 8.
Il bit map che rappresenta il carattere contenuto nei 10 byte
successivi espressi in binario. La formattazione di questi byte
la seguente:
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 d d d d d d
[Note]
[Default] Gli 8 caratteri hanno allaccensine vengono caricati con con
un bit map contenuto nella flash della stampante. Nel caso
lutente volesse modificare questi bit map deve eseguire un
upgrade del firmware.
[Riferimento]
[Esempio] Se si desidera che il simbolo del codice $1F sia #, si dovr
trasmettere ESC J 2 e di seguito i 10 byte che formano il
carattere:
$1B $4A $32 $52 $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $52
FT190SP 3- 20
ESC W
[Nome] Stampa una linea grafica a 200 dpi
[Formato] ASCII ESC W
HEX 1B 57
Decimale 27 87
[Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando la stampante aspetta
48 byte che corrispondono allintera riga grafica. Infatti 48
byte per 8 bit ciascuno corrispondono a 384 dot per linea.
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio]
ESC c
[Nome] Gestione della stampa dei bar code
[Formato] ASCII ESC c [codice] [altezza] [posizione] [opzio-
ni]
[lunghezza] [dati]
Hex 1B 63
Decimale 27 99
[Descrizione] [codice ASCII] Tipo di bar code
I Interleved 2/5
C Code 39
B CodaBar
e EAN8
E EAN13
[altezza]
Numero di dot line in unit di 1/8 di mm.
[posizione]
Margine dal bordo sinistro espresso in unit di 1/8 di mm.
[opzioni]
bit bit 0 bit 1
3- 21 FT190SP
bit0: check digit non viene stampato viene stampato

bit3,2: HRI 0=no 1=sopra 2=sotto 3=sopra e sotto
bit5,4: size 0=normale 1=doppio 2=triplo 3=qua-
druplo
[lunghezza massima]
Interleaved 2/5 = 12 caratteri
Code 39 = 10 caratteri
CodaBar = 10 caratteri
EAN8 = 8 caratteri
EAN13 = 13 caratteri
[dati]
Espressi in ASCII
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento]
[Esempio]
ESC Q
[Nome] Attiva la stampa sottolineata
[Formato] ASCII ESC Q
Hex 1B 51
Decimale 27 81
[Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando, i caratteri vengono
stampati sottolineati
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC q
[Esempio]
FT190SP 3- 22
ESC q
[Nome] Disattiva la stampa sottolineata
[Formato] ASCII ESC q
Hex 1B 71
Decimale 27 113
[Descrizione] Annulla la stampa sottolineata
[Note]
[Default]
[Riferimento] ESC Q
[Esempio]
3- 23 FT190SP
Blank page
FT190SP 3- 24
4.1 SPECIFICHE TECNICHE
La tabella 4.1 riporta le principali caratteristiche tecniche della stampante.
(Tab.4.1)
Colonne 24
24 40
40
Carattere (L x H mm)
Normale 2x3 1x3
Doppia altezza 2x6 1x6
Doppia larghezza 4x3 2x3
Espanso 4x6 2x6
Punto grafico 0,125 x 0,125 0,125 x 0,125
Punti riga emulaz ione Custom 144 240
Velocit di stampa (speed/current = normal)
Linee / sec 30 30
Caratteri / sec 220 320
Feed (linee / sec) 53 53
Buffer di linea 24 byte 40 byte
Buffer di stampa 1Kbyte
Metodo di stampa Termica a matrice di punti
Matrice di carattere 16 x 24 8x24
Modo di scrittura Diritto e rovesciato
Set di caratteri Normale ed esteso
Dim. rotolo carta 58 +/- 1mm x 50 mm max
Interfaccie standard RS232 o Centronics
Doppia o singola 5 Vcc 10%
Alimentaz ione
Singola 9 - 40 Vcc opzionale
Assorbimenti (con alimentaz ione a 5 Volt)
Selezione "Speed/current = LOW"
In stampa 3A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
4- 1 FT190SP
Selezione Speed/current = NORMAL

In stampa 4,5 A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
Selezione Speed/current = HIGH
In stampa 6A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
Condiz ioni ambientali
Temperatura di funzionamento 0 C - +50 C
Umidit di funzionamento 20% - 85% senza condensa
Temperatura di stoccaggio/Umidit -25C - +70C / 10% - 90%
Real time clock
Opz ioni
Alimentatore 9 - 40 Vcc
4.2 DIMENSIONI
In figura sono riportate le dimensioni della stampante da pannello FT190SP.

Con le viti montate a bordo della stampante, lo spessore massimo del pan-
nello di 5 mm; utilizzando le due viti aggiuntive in dotazione la stampante
pu essere montata su pannelli con spessore massimo di 15 mm. Per pan-
nelli con spessore maggiore utilizzare viti M3 pi lunghe.
(Fig.4.1)
FT190SP 4- 2
5. SERIE DI CARATTERI
5.1 SET DI CARATTERI
La stampante FT190SP dispone di due set di 224 caratteri ciascuno (font 1 e

font 2), richiamabili da programmazione (paragrafo 1.2) o tramite i caratteri di
controllo (paragrafo 3.2).
(Fig.5.1) (Fig.5.2)
5- 1 FT190SP
A.1 ACCESSORI
A.1.1 Alimentatore
La figura seguente mostra lalimentatore di produzione Custom Engineering
utilizzabile per il funzionamento della stampante FT190SP.
Lalimentatore disponibile in 3 modelli:
- PSM05 per la versione alimentata a 5V
- PSM12 e PSM24 per la versione alimentata a 9 - 40 V
(Fig.A.1)
GND cha ssis
LED on
(Tab.A.1) N L 0V 5V
Specifiche di ingresso
Tensione di ingresso 100 Vac to 240 Vac
Frequenza di ingresso 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Specifiche di Uscita PSM05

Tensione di Uscita 5V
Corrente di Uscita Minimum 0A
Maximum 3,6 A
Peak 5 A(1)
Short Circuit 6 A(2)
A- 1 FT190SP
Specifiche di Uscita PSM12 (per opzione 9 - 40 Vcc)

Tensione di Uscita 12 V
Maximum 4A
Peak 6A
Short Circuit 6A
Specifiche di Uscita PSM24 (per opzione 9 - 40 Vcc)

Tensione di Uscita 24 V
Maximum 2A
Peak 3,5 A
Short Circuit 6A
A.1.2 Avvolgicarta (Fig.A.2)
Alla stampante FT190SP pu essere collegato nel connettore J5 lavvolgicarta

modello AV03
Tecnical specifications:
Range of application Universal
Paper width (max) 60 mm
Roll diameter (max) 70 mm
Power supply 5 - 12Vdc 10%
Electrical input (max) 450 mA (Tab.A.2)
FT190SP A- 2
A.2 RICAMBI
(Tab.A.3)
RCT 57X50 Rotolo carta Termica

Quantit consigliate per n apparecchi acquistati
N apparecchi <10 <50 <100 >100
Quantit
5 30 60 90
consigliate (Fig.A.3)
A- 3 FT190SP
Thermal panel printer
FT190SP
Users manual
www.custom.it FT190SP
Printer components
1-Print mechanism
2-Case
3-Paper outfeed
4-Paper loading label
5-Front panel
6-Paper roll compartment
7-Control panel
8-Feed connector
9-Paper winder connector
10-Interface connector
11-External print key
connector
FT190SP
All rights reserved. The reproduction of this manual, either totally or partially,
in any form whatsoever, whether it be on paper or through computer
processes, is strictly prohibited. Custom Engineering s.r.l. and the resource
teams employed in the making of this manual will not be held responsible for
any problems arising as a result of improper use of this manual, as they
guarantee that the information contained in it has been subjected to careful
inspection.
Any suggestions regarding errors in its contents or possible improvements
will, nonetheless, be greatly appreciated. The products are continuously
checked and improved. For this reason Custom Engineering s.r.l. reserves
the right to modify the information contained in this manual without prior
notice.
COD. DOME - FT190SP REV.1.20
Copyright 1998 Custom Engineering s.r.l. Italy
Custom Engineering
Str. Berettine 2 - 43010 Fontevivo (PARMA) - Italy
Tel. : +39 0521-680111 Fax : +39 0521-610701
http: www.custom.it Email : support@custom.it
FT190SP
"CE" Declaration of Conformity
In accordance with standards ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN N:
45014 DC0302698
Manufacturer's name: Custom Engineering s.r.l.
Manufacturer's Strada Berettine 2
address: Fontevivo (Parma)
Italy
Declares that the product:
Product name: Panel printer with thermal print mechanism
Type name: FT190SP
Model: FT190SP RS232 / CENTRONICS
is in conformity with the following directives:
Electromagnetic compatibility directives EEC/89/336; EEC/92/31;
EEC/93/68
In accordance with the following standards:
EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement 1995
Class B of radio disturbance characteristics of
information technology equipment
EN 50082-1 Electromagnetic compatibility - 1992
General immunity standard. Part 2:
Industrial environments.
EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharge requirements 1995
4KV contact discharge, 8KV air
discharge
EN 61000-4-4 Fast electrical transient/burst 1995
requirements.
DC mains 0.5KV
ENV 50140 Radiated radio-frequency 1993
electromagnetic fields. Immunity tests.
3V/m, 80MHz-1000MHz, 80% 1KHz
AM
June 1998
FT190SP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS OF THE MANUAL ...................................................................... 1

CONVENTIONS USED IN THE MANUAL ..................................................... 1
GENERAL INFORMATION REGARDING SAFETY ..................................... 1
UNPACKING THE PRINTER ......................................................................... 3
GENERAL FEATURES .................................................................................. 3
DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINTER ............................................................... 4
1. INSTALLATION AND USE
1.1 CONNECTIONS ................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Power supply ................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Paper winder .................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.3 External print key ............................................................................ 1-2
1.2 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3 AUTOTEST .......................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP ........................................................................ 1-3
1.5 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1 Changing the paper roll .................................................................. 1-4
2. INTERFACES
2.1 RS232 SERIAL .................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 CENTRONICS PARALLEL .................................................................. 2-3
2.3 CALENDAR CLOCK (OPTIONAL) ...................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Adjusting the clock through the keypad ......................................... 2-4
3. PRINTER FUNCTIONS
3.1 PRINT DIRECTION ............................................................................. 3-1

3.2 CONTROL CHARACTERS ................................................................. 3-2
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 4-1

4.2 DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................... 4-2
i FT190SP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5. CHARACTER SETS
5.1 CHARACTER SETS ............................................................................ 5-1
APPENDIX A - ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS
A.1 ACCESSORIES................................................................................... A-1

A.1.1 Power supply ................................................................................. A-1
A.1.2 Paper winder .................................................................................. A-2
A.2 SPARE PARTS .................................................................................... A-3
FT190SP ii
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS OF THE MANUAL
In addition to the introduction which lists: the conventions used in the manual,
general information relative to safety, unpacking of the printer and a brief de-
scription of the printer itself, highlighting its main features, the manual is split up
into the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Containing the information required for installing and using the printer
correctly
Chapter 2: Containing the specifications of the interfaces
Chapter 3: Containing the description of the printer command set
Chapter 4: Containing the technical specifications of the printer
Chapter 5: Containing the character sets (fonts) used by the printer
CONVENTIONS USED IN THE MANUAL
N.B.
Gives important information or suggestions relative to the use of the
printer
WARNING
The information marked with this symbol must be carefully heeded to
safeguard against damaging the printer
DANGER
The information marked with this symbol must be carefully heeded to
safeguard against injury to the operator
GENERAL INFORMATION REGARDING SAFETY
Read and keep the following instructions.

Observe all warnings and follow all instructions attached to the printer.
Before cleaning the printer, disconnect the feed cable.
Clean the printer with a damp cloth. Do not use liquid or spray products.
Do not operate the printer near to water.
Do not place the printer on unsteady surfaces. It could fall and get seriously
damaged.
1 FT190SP
INTRODUCTION
Use the type of electricity supply marked on the printer label. In the event
of uncertainty, contact the seller.
Position the printer in such a way as to ensure that the cables connected
to it will not be damaged.
Ensure that the maximum absorbed current of the printer does not exceed
the maximum acceptable current for the type of feed cable used.
Do not put objects of any kind inside the printer as they could cause a
short circuit or damage parts which could affect its performance.
Do not spill liquids on the printer.
Do not carry out technical operations on the printer with the exception of
the scheduled maintenance operations specifically indicated in the users
manual.
Disconnect the printer from the electricity supply and have it repaired by a
specialized technician should any of the following conditions occur:
A. The feed connector has been damaged.
B. Liquid has penetrated to the inside of the printer;
C. The printer has been exposed to rain or water;
D. The printer is not operating normally despite the instructions in the
users manual having been followed.
E. The printer has been dropped and its case damaged.
F. The performance of the printer is poor.
G. The printer does not work.
FT190SP 2
INTRODUCTION
UNPACKING THE PRINTER
Remove the printer from the box, taking care not to damage the packing mate-
rial, as it could be needed for future transportation of the machine.
Ensure that all the components illustrated are in fact present and that they are in
perfect condition. If this is not the case, contact the after-sales assistance de-
partment immediately.
Printer
Manual (or Cdrom)
Paper roll (inside the printer)
Long screws
(Fig.1)
N.B.
Before using the long screws, read the note to paragraph 4.2.
GENERAL FEATURES
The FT190SP is a printer which, in addition to having an innovative design, guar-

antees high performance and is reliable and user-friendly.
For these reasons, it is the ideal solution for applications which require the im-
mediate printing of data on a ticket, whether they be of an industrial, professional
or laboratory nature. Typical fields of application are: weighing systems, receipts
(not for tax purposes) as well as for security, controlling and diagnostics pur-
poses.
It has a 200 dpi thermal print mechanism and uses 57.5mm paper rolls. It can
print 24 or 40 characters per line according to the selection made at the setup
stage or through a software command .
The FT190SP printer is so compact and lightweight that it can be installed ex-
tremely easily on any type of equipment. It is supplied with two interfaces: an
RS232 serial and Centronics parallel interface. To select one or the other inter-
face, some jumpers must be moved. The reception buffer is 1Kbytes. It can also
be equipped with a Real Time Clock.
3 FT190SP
INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINTER
The FT190SP printer has an ABS casing (1) with a front cover (2) which opens
to allow access to the paper roll and print head.
The control panel is located on the front (3) and has a PRINT key, a FEED key
and two LEDs: Power and Status.
(Fig.2)
PRINT key. When pressed, in serial causes the $0D control character to
be transmitted if enabled during printer setup. In parallel to the PRINT key
is the J6 connector which can be used to connect to an external key
(fig.1.1).
FEED key. When this is pressed, the paper feeds forward manually. If this
key is pressed briefly, when the RTCK option is installed, the date and time
of day is printed.
The POWER LED indicates that the printer is receiving a digital power
supply.
The STATUS LED, when flashing, signals that the paper is finished. When
lit steadily, it signals the presence of an error (head power supply too high
or too low or head temperature too high).
FT190SP 4
1.1 CONNECTIONS
(Fig.1.1)
1.1.1 Power supply
The FT190SP printer is equipped with a standard 4-pin male AMPMODU1-type

connector (J4). The signals on the connector pins are as follows:
WARNING
Respect the polarity of the power supply.
5V VERSION
PIN SIGNAL NOTES
1 GND
2 GND
3 +VT: from 4.5 Volt to 7 Volt (head power supply)
4 +VDC: 5 Vdc 7% (logic card power supply)
(Tab.1.1)
1-1 FT190SP
VERSION 9 - 40V
PIN SIGNAL NOT ES
1 GND
2 GND
3 from 9 Vdc to 40 Vdc
4 N.C.
(Tab.1.2)
1.1.2 Paper winder
Connector J5 (fig.1.1) is used to feed the external paper winder. The position
and function of the signals are given below in Table 1.3.
Pin Signal
1 MOTOR +
2 MOTOR -
(Tab.1.3)
1.1.3 External print key
An external print key may be connected to connector J6 (fig. 1.1). The polarity
and function of the signals are given in Table 1.4.
Pin Signal
1 PRINT
(Tab.1.4)
2 GND
1.2 CONFIGURATION
The FT190SP enables the configuration of the printer default parameters.This

procedure is enabled by holding down the PRINT and FEED keys while switching
on, with the jumper JP2 (Fig. 2.1) present on the printer card open.
FT190SP 1-2
After this, each time the PRINT key is pressed, the parameter is modified
and its current value is printed. Once the required value has been obtained,
press the FEED key to proceed to the next parameter, and so on. Once all
the parameters have been run through, the printing of a message signals the
end of the setting procedure.
The parameters affected during configuration are:
Selection of the number of columns (24 or 40)

Print direction (normal or reverse)
Selection of the character dimensions (normal, double width, double
height, expanded)
Selection of the font (font 1 or font 2)
Enabling or disabling of the CR command
AUTOFEED enabling or disabling : if the function is enabled when the
printer receives a characters number equal to the line buffer the next
character will place on the left margin in a new line
Selection of the print speed in function of the absorption
Selection of the red intensity : using two-colour thermal paper is
possible to set different red tonality
Selection of the parameters for serial or parallel communication
Enabling or disabling of the 1Kbyte buffer
Enabling setting of the real time clock
Enabling of seconds printing in the real time clock function
The settings made are saved on the EEPROM (non volatile memory).
1.3 AUTOTEST
To run the autotest, hold down the FEED key, while switching on the printer. The
autotest causes the printing of the printers current setting data and the printing
of the complete ASCII character set.
1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP
If the PRINT key is held down during switching on, the printer enters
Hexadecimal Dump mode. This function is used for the diagnostics of
characters received in serial or parallel. In fact, these are printed in hexademical
code together with the corresponding ASCII code.
1-3 FT190SP
1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 Changing the paper roll
To change the paper roll, proceed as follows:
1) Open the printer cover and press down the swinging support of the print
mechanism at the point marked PUSH;
2) Insert the end of the paper roll in the slit of the print mechanism and position
the paper roll so that it rotates in the right direction, as shown in the figure;
3) The paper is automatically pulled by the roller for 3 or 4 centimetres;
4) Tear off the paper and re-close the cover.
(Fig.1.2)
WARNING
Make sure the paper edge is straight
before inserting it in the machine.
FT190SP 1-4
2. INTERFACES
(Fig.2.1)
The selection of the RS232 or CENTRONICS interface is made through the 20-
contact strip:
When the strip is placed in position 1-2 (fig.2.1) the standard CENTRONICS
interface is selected; when placed in position 2-3 the RS232 interface is
selected.
2.1 RS232 SERIAL
The printer has an RS232 serial interface and is connected using a 25-pin
female connector. The communication signals used for serial protocol are TXD,
RXD and RTS (if the RTS/CTS protocol was selected) or TXD and RXD if the
XON/XOF protocol was selected.
Given below are the signals present on the connector:
PIN SIGNAL DIRECTION DESCRIPTION
1 NC -
2 TXD Output Data transmission
3 RXD Input Data reception
4 RTS Output Same as DTR signal
7 SG - Ground signal
2-1 FT190SP
2. INTERFACES
PIN SIGNAL DIRECTION DESCRIPTION
When the DTR/DSR command is selected,

this signal indicates when the printer is busy.
20 DTR Output SPACE indicates that the printer is ready to
receive data and MARK that the printer is
busy.
23 GND - Ground
24 GND - Ground
25 GND - Ground
(Tab.2.1)
The diagrams below give sample connections between the printer and Personal
Computer using a 25- and 9-pin female connector.
(Fig.2.2)
(Fig.2.3)
FT190SP 2-2
2. INTERFACES
2.2 CENTRONICS PARALLEL
The printer has a Centronics parallel interface and is connected using a 25-pin
female connector. The following signals can be used for parallel communication:
1) 7 or 8 bit data bus;

2) STROBE signal that indicates data validity;
3) BUSY signal that indicates if printer is available to receive data;
4) ACK signal for data read confirmation.
Given below are the signals present on the connector:
PIN SIGNAL DIRECTION

1 Strobe Input
2 Data bit 0 Input
3 Data bit 1 Input
4 Data bit 2 Input
5 Data bit 3 Input
6 Data bit 4 Input
7 Data bit 5 Input
8 Data bit 6 Input
9 Data bit 7 Input
10 ACK Output
11 BUSY Output
12 PAPER END Output
13 HIGHT Output
14 NC -
15 FALT Output
16 RESET Input
17-25 GND -
(Tab.2.2)
2-3 FT190SP
2. INTERFACES
2.3 CALENDAR CLOCK (optional)
The Real Time Clock is available as an option.

Printing and adjustment of the clock are managed by a series of control
characters, described as follows.
N.B.
For the real time clock control characters, please refer to the
description of the printer command sets in chapter 3
2.3.1 Adjusting the clock through the keypad
The time and date can be adjusted using the PRINT and FEED keys on the
printers front panel. To set, proceed as follows:
While holding down the FEED key, press the PRINT key. The printer will
print the time and date with an arrow indicating the digit to be modified;
Each time the PRINT key is pressed, the digit marked by the arrow will
increase and an updated version will be printed;
To proceed to modify another digit, press the FEED key again. Each time
the printer will print the updated time and date, highlighting with an arrow the
currently selected digit;
To terminate the setting procedure, press PRINT and FEED at the same
time.
FT190SP 2-4
3.1 PRINT DIRECTION
The FT190SP printer has two printing directions which can be selected by
means of the control characters:
normal and reverse.
Paper Outfeed Direction

Panel printer
SP SP
Panel printer
Normal mode Reverse mode
(Fig.3.1)
3-1 FT190SP
3.2 CONTROL CHARACTERS
The command table lists all the commands for the management of the FT190SP
printer functions. These commands can be transmitted to the printer with both
the serial and parallel interfaces; if, however, the parallel interface is being used,
the user will not be able to receive any kind of response, as this interface is
mono-directional.
The commands can be transmitted to the printer at any moment, but they will only
be carried out when the characters previously transmitted have been printed or
the commands previously transmitted have been carried out. There are no
commands with priority status; all the commands are carried out when the
circular buffer is free to do so.
(Tab.3.1) COMMAND TABLE

ASC II C om. H EX C om. D escription
$00 Pri nts i n small characters
$01 Pri nts i n double wi dth
$02 Pri nts i n double hei ght
$03 Expanded pri nti ng
$04 Restores small character pri nti ng
$0A Forward feeds one li ne
(n) $0B Forward feeds (n) li ne
$0D Pri nts li ne buffer
$0F Sets C RLF mode
$11 Graphi c mode
$12 Pri nts ti me and date
$13 Sets ti me and date
$14 Transmi ts ti me and date i n seri al
$17 Pri nts 1st programmable character
$18 Pri nts 2nd programmable character
$19 Pri nts 3rd programmable character
$1A Pri nts 4th programmable character
$1C Pri nts 5th programmable character
$1D Pri nts 6th programmable character
FT190SP 3-2
ASCII Com. HEX Com. Description

$1E Prints 7th programmable character
$1F Prints 8th programmable character
ESC A $1B $41 Executes [n] dots line feed
ESC R $1B $52 Sets reverse mode printing
ESC N $1B $4E Sets normal mode printing
ESC @ $1B $40 Resets the printer
ESC D $1B $44 Enters date in print buffer
ESC T $1B $54 Enters time in print buffer
ESC U $1B $55 Enters date (mm:dd:yy) in print buffer
ESC S $1B $53 Enables printing of seconds
ESC X $1B $58 Prints in red
ESC x $1B $78 Prints in black
ESC B $1B $42 Sets character font 1
ESC b $1B $62 Sets character font 2
ESC I $1B $49 Selects 24 columns
ESC i $1B $69 Selects 40 columns
(aa) ESC r (aa) $1B $72 Reads data at an address (aa)
(aadd) $1B
(aadd) ESC w Writes data (dd) in an address (aa)
$77
(dd) ESC G (dd) $1B $47 Writes value (dd) in option register
(dd) ESC K (dd) $1B $4B Writes value (dd) in option register 1
(dd) ESC M (dd) $1B $4D Writes value (dd) in print mode
ESC p $1B $70 Transmits option register in serial
ESC k $1B $6B Transmits option register 1 in serial
ESC m $1B $6D Transmits print mode in serial
ESC s $1B $73 Transmits next character in serial
(dd) ESC a $1B $61 Selects number of dot spaces
ESC J (n) $1B $4A Loads programmable character
ESC W $1B $57 Prints graphic line of 200 dpi
ESC c $1B $63 Management of bar code printing
ESC Q $1B $51 Enables underlining
ESC q $1B $71 Disables underlining
3-3 FT190SP
A more detailed description of the single commands can be found below.

00H
[Name] Small character printing
[Format] ASCII -
Hex 00
Decimal 0
[Description] The printer prints in small characters (normal)
[Notes] The commands 00H - 09H do not cancel the print buffer
The commands which modify the direction of the characters
are only active at the beginning of the line
[Default] Setting in option register by means of front keys
[Reference] 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H
[Example]
01H
[Name] Double width printing
[Format] ASCII -
Hex 01
Decimal 1
[Description] The printer prints in double width format
[Reference] 00H, 02H, 03H, 04H
[Example]
02H
[Name] Double height printing
[Format] ASCII -
Hex 02
Decimal 2
[Description] The printer prints in double height format
FT190SP 3-4
[D efault] Setti ng i n opti on regi ster by means of front keys

[Reference] 00H , 01H , 03H , 04H
[Example]
03H
[Name] Expanded printing
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 03
D eci mal 3
[D escri pti on] The pri nter pri nts i n expanded character mode
[Notes] commands 00H-09H do not cancel the pri nt buffer
the commands whi ch modi fy the di mensi ons of the
characters are only acti ve at the begi nni ng of the li ne
[D efault] Setti ng i n the opti on regi ster by means of the front keys
[Reference] 00H , 01H , 02H , 04H
[Example]
04H
[Name] R estore small character printing
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 04
D eci mal 4
[D escri pti on] The pri nter resumes pri nti ng wi th small characters
[Notes] commands 00H-09H do not cancel the pri nt buffer
the commands whi ch modi fy the di mensi ons of the
characters are only acti ve at the begi nni ng of the li ne
[Reference] 00H , 01H , 02H , 03H
[Example]
0AH
[Name] Forw ard feeds one line
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 0A
D eci mal 10
[D escri pti on] Forward feeds one li ne equi valent to a li ne of pri nt
[Notes] Thi s command bri ngs about the pri nti ng of the contents of
the li ne buffer
3-5 FT190SP
[D efault]
[Reference] 0B H
[Example]
(n) 0B H
[Name] Forw ard feeds (n) lines
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 0B
D eci mal 11
[D escri pti on] C arri es out the number of li ne feeds speci fi ed i n (n)
[Notes] The number must be ASC II and between 0 and 9 (when n=0
the command i s i gnored)
Thi s command clears the li ne buffer
[D efault]
[Reference] 0AH
[Example] To forward feed fast, 5 li nes at a ti me:
$35 $0B (or 5 and the command $0B)
0D H
[Name] Print the line buffer
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 0D
D eci mal 13
[D escri pti on] Thi s command pri nts the li ne buffer
[Notes] If the li ne buffer i s empty, the command i s i gnored
If the C RLF opti on i s set, thi s command i s i gnored and
pri nti ng can only be ordered through the command $0A
[D efault]
[Reference] 0F H
[Example]
0F H
[Name] Set C R LF mode
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 0F
D eci mal 15
[D escri pti on] Inhi bi ts the command $0D mai ntai ni ng enabled only the
command $0A for pri nti ng
FT190SP 3-6
[Notes] To di sable thi s opti on, reset the pri nter

Thi s command clears the li ne buffer
On swi tchi ng on the default value i s i n the Opti on Regi ster
[Reference] 0D H
[Example]
11H
[Name] Graphic mode
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 11
D eci mal 17
[D escri pti on] Enables graphi c mode:
a li ne i n 24 column mode corresponds to 144 hori zontal dots
di vi ded i nto 24 blocks of 6 dots each; a li ne i n 40 column
mode corresponds to 240 hori zontal dots di vi ded i nto 40
blocks of 6 dots each.
[Notes] To obtai n graphi c pri nti ng, enter the command $11 at the
begi nni ng of each li ne. The format of the byte i n graphi c
confi gurati on i s:
X R P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
where:
X i s not used (0 i s recommended);
R must be fi xed at level 1;
P1,.P6 are the graphi c dot data (1 pri nts, 0 does not pri nt).
The P6 bi t of the stri ng of dots transmi tted i s pri nted on the
left and the others follow from left to ri ght (P5, P4, P3, P2,
P1) as shown:
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
[D efault]
[Reference]
[Example] To pri nt a li ne of dots, transmi t:
$11, n x $7F (where n i s the number of characters per li ne),
$0D .
To pri nt an empty li ne, transmi t:
$11, $40, $0D .
3-7 FT190SP
12H
[Name] Print time and date
[Format] ASCII -
Hex 12
Decimal 18
[Description] Prints the time and date in the following format:
hh : mm dd - mm -yy
If seconds printing is enabled, the format will be:
hh : mm : ss dd - mm -yy
[Notes] The command resets the line
[Default]
[Reference] 13H , 14H
[Example]
13H
[Name] Set time and date
[Format] ASCII -
Hex 13
Decimal 19
[Description] This command sets the time and date in two possible ways:
the first uses the 24-hour clock and the second the 12-hour
am/pm clock. In the first case, transmit the 10 ASCII
characters representing the time and the date followed by
$13 and in the second case transmit the 10 ASCII characters
representing the time and the date preceded by "A" or "P"
and followed by $13.
[Notes] It is advisable to transmit the command $0D first, in order to
empty the print buffer
[Default]
[Example] To set the time 12:45 on 19-01-93, transmit:
1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13
$31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33 $13
To set the time A12:45 on 19-01-93, transmit:

A 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13
$41 $31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33
$13
FT190SP 3-8
14H
[Name] Transmit the time and date in serial
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 14
D eci mal 20
[D escri pti on] Transmi t the ti me and date on the seri al port i n 11 ASC II:
character format: hours/mi nutes/day/month/year + (C R) $0D
[Notes]
[D efault]
[Example]
17H ,...1FH
[Name] Print 1st (...8th) programmable character
[Format] ASC II -
Hex 17, ...1F
D eci mal 23, ...31
[D escri pti on] Thi s command pri nts the correspondi ng programmable
character.
[Note]
[D efault] BIT MAP contai ned i n flash
[Reference] 17H , 18H , 19H , 1AH , 1C H , 1D H , 1EH , 1FH
[Example]
ESC A [nH ] [nL]

[Name] Executes [n] dots line feed
[Format] ASC II ESC A nH nL
Hex 1B 41 nH nL
D eci mal 27 65 nH nL
[D escri pti on] Executes [n] dots li ne feed
ESC R
[Name] Set reverse mode printing
[Format] ASC II ESC R
Hex 1B 52
D eci mal 27 82
[D escri pti on] Selects pri nti ng i n reverse mode: the recei pt feeds out of hte
pri nter wi th the pri nti ng i n normal mode runni ng from left to
ri ght
3-9 FT190SP
[Notes]
[Reference] ESC N
[Example]
ESC N
[Name] Set normal mode printing
[Format] ASC II ESC N
Hex 1B 4E
D eci mal 27 78
[D escri pti on] Select normal mode pri nti ng:the recei pt feeds out of the
pri nter wi th the pri nti ng upsi de down runni ng from ri ght to left
[Notes]
[Reference] ESC R
[Example]
ESC @
[Name] R esets the printer
[Format] ASC II ESC @
Hex 1B 40
D eci mal 27 64
[D escri pti on] C ancels all the data i n the pri nt buffer and resets the pri nter
mode, restori ng the mode whi ch was enabled at the moment
of swi tchi ng on
[Notes] Same as hardware reset
After the command has been transmi tted, 1.5 seconds
elapse before the pri nter i s enabled
[D efault]
[Reference]
[Example] Thi s can be useful duri ng swi tchi ng on i n order to avoi d the
sendi ng of false characters duri ng i ni ti ali zati on by the master
devi ce
ESC D
[Name] Enters the date in the print buffer
[Format] ASC II ESC D
Hex 1B 44
D eci mal 27 68
[D escri pti on] Enters i n the buffer the date of the calender clock i nstalled
i nsi de the pri nter, i n the followi ng format: dd - mm -yy.
FT190SP 3-10
[Notes] The date is printed in 8 characters: if there is not enough
space in the buffer, it w ill not be printed
It does not zero-set the line buffer
[Default]
[Reference] ESC T, ESC U
[Example] If you w ish to w rite:
DATE: 11-09-93 TEST OK
transmit DATE: $1b $44 TEST OK $0D
to print just the date $1B $44 $0D
ESC T
[Name] Enters the time in the print buffer
[Format] ASCII ESC T
Hex 1B 54
Decimal 27 84
[Description] Enters in the buffer the time on the calendar clock installed
inside the printer, in the follow ing format: hh:mm
[Notes] The time is printed in 5 characters and, if the seconds
option is enabled, in 8 characters: if there is not enough
space in the buffer, it w ill not be printed.
[Default]
[Reference] ESC D, ESC U, ESC S
HOUR: 16:45 TEST OK
transmit HOUR $1b $54 TEST OK $0D
ESC U
[Name] Enter the date (mm - dd - yy) in the print buffer
[Format] ASCII ESC U
Hex 1B 55
Decimal 27 85
[Description] Enter in the buffer the date on the calendar clock installed
inside the printer, American style: mm-dd-yy
[Notes] The date is printed in 8 characters: if there is not enough
space in the buffer, it w ill not be printed
[Default]
[Reference] ESC D, ESC T
DATE: 09-11-93 TEST OK
transmit DATE: $1b $55 TEST OK $0D
3-11 FT190SP
ESC S
[Name] Enables printing of seconds
[Format] ASCII ESC S
Hex 1B 53
Decimal 27 83
[Description Enables the printing of the seconds when the time of day is
requested through command ESC T
[Notes]
[Reference] ESC T
[Example
ESC X
[Name] Prints in red
[Format] ASCII ESC X
Hex 1B 58
Decimal 27 78
[Description] After receiving this command the printer prepares itself to
print in red
[Notes]
ESC x
[Name] Prints in black
[Format] ASCII ESC x
Hex 1B 78
Decimal 27 120
[Description] After receiving this command the printer prepares itself to
print in black
[Note]
FT190SP 3-12
ESC B
[Name] Sets font 1
[Format] ASCII ESC B
Hex 1B 42
Decimal 27 66
[Description] Selects the first character font
[Notes] The complete font is printed during the autotest. Some
codes are not standard: $60, $7B, $7C, $7D, $7E, $7F, $8D,
$ED, $FA, $FF
[Default] Setting in the option register by means of the front keys
[Reference] ESC b
[Example]
ESC b
[Name] Sets font 2
[Format] ASCII ESC b
Hex 1B 62
Decimal 27 98
[Description] Selects the second character font
[Note] The complete font is printed during the autotest. The font
contains cyrillic characters
[Reference] ESC B
[Example]
ESC l
[Name] Select 24 columns
[Format] ASCII ESC l
Hex 1B 49
Decimal 27 73
[Description] On receiving this command, the printer enters 24-column per
line printing mode
[Notes]
[Default]
[Reference] ESC i
[Example]
3-13 FT190SP
ESC i
[Name] Select 40 columns
[Format] ASCII ESC i
Hex 1B 69
Decimal 27 105
[Description] On receiving this command, the printer enters 40-column per
line printing mode
[Notes]
[Default]
[Reference] ESC l
[Example]
(aa) ESC r
[Name] Read data at an address (aa)
[Format] ASCII aH aL ESC r
Hex aH aL 1B 72
Decimal aH aL 27 114
[Description] Read a memory location (EEPROM) at address a:
aH is the most significant nibble of a expressed in ASCII
aL is the least significant nibble of a expressed in ASCII
[Notes] There are 256 legible locations (from $00 to $FF)
[Default] The whole memory bank contains the value $20 by default
[Reference] ESC w
[Example] To read address $01, transmit in ASCII:
$30 $31 $1B $72
If address $01 contains $A5, we will receive:
$41 $35
FT190SP 3-14
(aadd) ESC w
[Name] Write data (dd) in address (aa)
[Format] ASCII aH aL dH dL ESC w
Hex aH aL dH dL 1B 77
Decimal aH aL dH dL 27 119
[Description] Save data d in address a in the memory (EEPROM):
aH is the most significant nibble of a expressed in ASCII
aL is the least significant nibble of a expressed in ASCII
dH is the most significant nibble of d expressed in ASCII
dL is the least significant nibble of d expressed in ASCII
[Notes] There are 256 writable locations (from $00 to $FF). The
data maximum is $FF (255) and both the addresses and the
data must be expressed in ASCII on two bytes
[Default] The whole memory bank contains the value $20 by default
[Reference] ESC r
[Example] To save the data $A5 in the address $01, transmit:
$30 $31 $41 $35 $1B $77
(dd) ESC G
[Name] Write the value (dd) in the option register
[Format] ASCII dH dL ESC G
Hex dH dL 1B 47
Decimal dH dL 27 71
[Description] Modify the configuration register. (dd) are two ascii characters
which represent the hexadecimal code for the programming of
the register.
(dd) bit=0 bit=1
bit0: setting of real time clock disabled enabled
bit1: print direction normal reverse
bit2: number bits in parallel reception 8 7
bit3: printing of seconds disabled enabled
bit4: CR ($0D) enabled disabled
hardware
bit5: reception parameter selection software
(dipswitch)
bit6: font selection font 1 font 2
bit7: reception buffer 1Kbyte N
columns
3-15 FT190SP
[Notes] The setting is memorized in the EEPROM and assumed as

the default value the next time the printer is switched on
[Default]
[Reference] ESC K
[Example] To send setting byte 00001001 ($09):
$30 $39 $1B $47
(dd) ESC K
[Name] Write the value (dd) in the option register 1
[Format] ASCII dH dL ESC K
Hex dH dL 1B 4B
Decimal dH dL 27 75
[Description] Modifies the configuration register. (dd) are two ASCII
characters representing the hexadecimal code for the
programming of the register.
(dd) bit=0 bit=1
bit0: number of columns 24 columns 40 columns

[Notes] The setting is memorized in the EEPROM and assumed as
default value the next time the printer is switched on
[Default]
[Reference] ESC G
[Example] To send setting byte 00001001 ($09):
$30 $39 $1B $47
(dd) ESC M
[Name] Writes the value (dd) in the print mode
[Format] ASCII dH dL ESC M
Hex dH dL 1B 4D
Decimal dH dL 27 77
[Description] Sets the print mode default parameters:
$00 small character printing
$01 double width printing
$02 double height printing
$03 expanded printing
FT190SP 3-16
[Notes] The setting is stored in the EEPROM

[Default] Setting by means of the front keys
[Reference] ESC m
[Example] For double height printing, transmit:
$30 $32 $1B $4D
ESC p
[Name] Transmit the configuration register in serial
[Format] ASCII ESC p
Hex 1B 70
Decimal 27 112
[Description] Transmit the option register byte on the serial port
[Notes] If the printer is using the parallel protocol, nothing with be
transmitted
[Default]
[Reference] ESC G, ESC K, ESC k
[Example] The response is on two bytes. E.g., if you receive:
$30 $39
it means that the default configuration is 00001001
ESC k
[Name] Transmits the second configuration register in serial
[Format] ASCII ESC k
Hex 1B 6B
Decimal 27 107
[Description] Transmits in serial the value of the second configuration
register in ASCII format on two characters which represent
the hexadecimal value
transmitted
[Default]
[Reference] ESC K
[Example] The response is on two bytes. E.g. if you receive:
$30 $39
it means that the default register is 00001001
3-17 FT190SP
ESC m
[Name] Transmits the print mode in serial
[Format] ASCII ESC m
Hex 1B 6D
Decimal 27 109
[Description] Transmits the print mode configuration on the serial port
transmitted
[Reference] ESC B
[Example] The response is on two bytes. E.g. if you receive:
$30, $32
it means that printing is in double height mode
ESC s
[Name] Transmits the next character in serial
[Format] ASCII ESC s
Hex 1B 73
Decimal 27 115
[Description] Transmits the next character it receives on the serial port
[Notes]
[Default]
[Reference]
[Example] If you transmit: ESC s A
the last character, A, will not be printed but immediately
transmitted on the serial line
(dd) ESC a
[Name] Selects the number of dot spaces
[Format] ASCII (dd) ESC a
Hex (dd) 1B 61
Decimal (dd) 27 97
[Description] (dd) are two ASCII characters which identify a hexadecimal
byte and correspond to the number of dot lines between one
print line and another
FT190SP 3-18
[Notes]
[Default] =0
[Reference]
[Example]
ESC J (n) 10*(d)

[Name] Load the programmable character
[Format] ASCII ESC J (n)
Hex 1B 4A (n)
Decimal 27 74 (n)
[Description] (n) corresponds to the character number,i.e. between 1and 8.
The bit map that represents the character is contained in the
next 10 bytes expressed in binary code. The formatting of
these bytes is as follows:
bi t 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 d d d d d d
[Notes]
[Default] The 8 characters available on switching on are loaded with a
bit map contained in the printer's flash. To modify these bit
maps, a firmware upgrade is required.
[Reference]
[Example]
If you wish the symbol of the code $1F to be #, transmit ESC
J 2 followed by the 10 bytes making up the character:
$1B $4A $32 $52 $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $52
ESC W
[Name] Print a graphic line at 200 dpi
[Format] ASCII ESC W
HEX 1B 57
Decimal 27 87
[Description] After receiving this command, the printer waits for 48 bytes
which correspond to an entire graphic line. In fact, 48 bytes
of 8 bits each correspond to 384 dots per line.
[Notes]
3-19 FT190SP
[Default]
[Reference]
[Example]
ESC c
[Name] Management of bar code printing
[Format] ESC c [code] [height] [position] [options]
ASCII
[length] [data]
Hex 1B 63
Decimal 27 99
[Description] [ASCII code] Type of bar code
I Interleved 2/5
C C ode 39
B C odaB ar
e EAN8
E EAN13
[height]
Number of dot lines in 1/8 mm. units.
[position]
Left hand margin, expressed in 1/8 mm. units
[options]
bi t bi t 0 bi t 1
bit0: check digit is not printed is printed
bit3,2: HRI 0=no 1=above 2=below 3=above & below
bit5,4: size 0=normal 1=double 2=triple 3=quadruple
[maximum length]
Interleaved 2/5 = 12 characters
C ode 39 = 10 characters
C odaB ar = 10 characters
EAN8 = 8 characters
EAN13 = 13 characters
[data]
Expressed in ASCII
[Notes]
FT190SP 3-20
[Default]
[Reference]
[Example]
ESC Q
[Name] Enable underlined printing
[Format] ASCII ESC Q
Hex 1B 51
Decimal 27 81
[Description] After this command has been received, the characters are
printed underlined
[Note]
[Default]
[Reference] ESC q
[Example]
ESC q
[Name] Disables underlined printing
[Format] ASCII ESC q
Hex 1B 71
Decimal 27 113
[Description] Annuls underlined printing
[Notes]
[Default]
[Reference] ESC Q
[Example]
3-21 FT190SP
4.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The main technical features of the printer are listed in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Columns 24
24 40
40
Character (L x H mm)
Normal 2x3 1x3
Double height 2x6 1x6
Double width 4x3 2x3
Expanded 4x6 2x6
Graphic dot 0,125 x 0,125 0,125 x 0,125
Custom emulation dots per line 144 240
Print speed (speed/current = normal)
Lines/sec 30 30
Characters/sec 220 320
Feed (lines/sec) 53 53
Line buffer 24 byte 40 byte
Print buffer 1Kbyte
Print method Thermal dot matrix
Character matrix 16 x 24 8x24
Print direction Normal or reverse
Character set Normal and extended
Paper roll dimensions 58 +/- 1mm x 50 mm max
Standard interfaces RS232 or Centronics
Pow er supply Double or single 5 Vdc. 10%
Absorption (w ith 5 Volt pow er supply)
Selection Speed/current = LOW
Printing 3A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
4-1 FT190SP
Selection Speed/current = NORMAL

Printing 4,5 A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
Selection Speed/current = HIGH
Printing 6A
Stand by 100 mA
In feed 750 mA
Environmentals conditions
Operating temperature 0C - 50C
Operating humidity 20% - 85% (no condensing)
Storage temperature / humidity -25C - +70C / 10% - 90%
Real time clock
Options
9 - 40 Vcc Power supply
4.2 DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of the FT190SP panel printer are shown in the figure below.
With the screws fitted in the printer, the maximum thickness of the panel is 5
mm; using the two additional screws provided, the printer can be mounted on
panels with a maximum thickness of 15 mm. For even thicker panels, use
longer M3 screws.
(Fig.4.1)
FT190SP 4-2
5. CHARACTER SETS
5.1 CHARACTER SETS
The FT190SP printer has two characters sets, each containing 224 characters
(font 1 and font 2), which can be called up through the programming (paragraph
1.2) or through the control characters (paragraph 3.2).
(Fig.5.1) (Fig.5.2)
5-1 FT190SP
APPENDIX A - ACCESSORI ES AND SPARE PARTS
A.1 ACCESSORIES
A.1.1 Power supply

The drawing below shows the power supply manufactured by Custom
Engineering to be used with the FT190SP printer.
The power supply is available in 3 models:
- PSM05 for the 5V version
- PSM12 and PSM24 for the 9-40V version
(Fig.A.1)
GND cha ssis
LED on
N L 0V 5V
(Tab.A.1)
Input specifications
Input voltage 100 Vac to 240 Vac
Input frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz
PSM05 Output specifications
Output voltage 5V
Output current Minimum 0A
Maximum 3,6 A
Peak 5 A(1)
Short Circuit 6 A(2)
A-1 FT190SP
tt APPENDIX A - ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS
PSM12 Output specifications (for 9-40VDC version)

Output voltage 12 V
Maximum 4A
Peak 6A
Short Circuit 6A
PSM24 Output specifications (for 9-40VDC version)

Output voltage 24 V
Maximum 2A
Peak 3,5 A
Short Circuit 6A
(Fig.A.2)
A.1.2 Paper winder
The AV03 model paper winder can be connected to the FT190SP at the
J5 connector.
Technical specifications:
Tecnical specifications:
Range of application Universal
Paper w idth (max) 60 mm
Roll diameter (max) 70 mm
Pow er supply 5 - 12Vdc 10%
Electrical input (max) 450 mA (Tab.A.2)
FT190SP A-2
APPENDIX A - ACCESSORI ES AND SPARE PARTS
A.2 SPARE PARTS

(Tab.A.3)
R C T 57X 50 Thermal paper roll

Quantity recommended per n machines purchased
N machines <10 <50 <100 >100
Quantities
5 30 60 90 (Fig.A.3)
recommended
A-3 FT190SP
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Termostato
CD220008
Thermostat

55.32532.816 E.G.O. ITALIANA S.p.A.
Temperatura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169_ _C Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169_C

Temperatura min. bulbo . . . . . . . . . . --10_ _C Min bulb temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --10_C
Temperatura max. bulbo . . . . . . . . . 340_ _C Max bulb temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340_C
Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 V Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 V
Corrente . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 A Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 A
Lunghezza capillare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 mm Capillary lenght . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 mm

Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1

Valvola di ritegno, silenziatore regolatore di portata CJ080026
Non--return valve, flow control silencer CJ080035
Valvola di ritegno: EAK2000--F02 SMC

Non--return valve
Silenziatore regolatore di portata: 0672 LEGRIS
Flow control silencer
CODICE: CJ080026 Valvola di ritegno: EAK2000--F02

Code Non--return valve
Attacco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/4 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/4

Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar
Temperatura di lavoro . . . 5...60_C Working temperature . . . . 5...60_C
CODICE: CJ080035 Silenziatore regolatore di portata: 0672

Code Flow control silencer
Attacco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/4 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1/4

Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 bar Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 bar
Temperatura di lavoro . . . --20...150_C Working temperature . . . . --20...150_C
CJ080035
CJ080026
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1
Pressostato CD240042
Pressure switch

PS1--A3A ALCO CONTROLS
Range pressione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --0.5 7 bar Pressure range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --0.5 7 bar

Differenziale regolabile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 5 bar Differential setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 5 bar
Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 SRE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 SRE
Pressione di prova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 bar Test pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 bar
Materiale diaframma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bronzo Diaphragm material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bronze
86
70 44
64 1
32 25
4.5
30
75
35
24
25
M4 / UNC No. 8 -- 32
23
Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1
Valvola a sfera CJ070047

Ball valve
VSX--FF FINECO S.p.A.
Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4
Materiali Material
Corpo, sfera e albero ......... AISI 316 Body, ball and shaft ...... AISI 316

Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Regolatore di portata
CB020137
Flow regulator
ASN2--01 SMC
Attacco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8

Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 bar Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 bar
Temperatura di lavoro . . . 5...60_C Working temperature . . . . 5...60_C

Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1

Pressostato CD240057
Pressure switch
XML--A010A2S11 TELEMECANIQUE
Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4

Campo di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.612 bar Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.612 bar
Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 bar Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 bar

ID no. 83925
COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 1 - Page 1/1
Valvola di sicurezza senza leva CJ060365

Safety relief valve without lever CJ060366
SLKC10APBT NUOVA COI
Fluido di processo........... vapore saturo Process fluid ..................... saturated steam

aria compressa compressed air
Diametro orifizio ...............10 mm Opening diameter .......... 10 mm
Attacco in entrata............. DN 10.2 Inlet connection .............. DN 10.2
Attacco in uscita............... G filettato Outlet connection............ G threaded
Femmina female
Coefficiente defflusso .. 0.937 Flow Coefficient............... 0.937
Sovrapressione ................. 10% Overpressure ................... 10%
Massimo errore di Max allowable
taratura ammissibile ....... - 0+4% setting error ....................... - 0+4%
Omologazione.................... PED Homologation ................... PED
Condizioni di Portata di
Pressione di Portata di Temperatura
processo vapore
CODICE / CODE taratura aria max
Process Steam flow
Set pressure Air flow rate Max temperature
condition rate
CJ060365 4.0 barg -1+4 barg 206 kg/h 278 kg/h 158C
CJ060366 3.5 barg -1+3 barg 186 kg/h 250 kg/h 152C
Materiali Material
Tenuta .................................... PTFE (certificato FDA) Seal .................................... PTFE (FDA certified)
Boccaglio ............................ AISI 316 L Nozzle ................................ AISI 316 L
Otturatore............................. AISI 316 L Shutter ............................... AISI 316 L
Corpo ..................................... Ottone Body .................................... Brass
Molla ....................................... AISI 316 Spring.................................. EPDM
ID no. 84024
Compressore
CF040013
Compressor
607CD22LK ASF THOMAS - PUMPS & COMPRESSOR
Portata ........................................ 19,5 l/min Flow rate ......................................... 19,5 l/min

Pressione max......................... 7 bar Max pressure ................................. 7 bar
Protezione.................................. IP20 Protection ........................................ IP20
Tensione ..................................... 220 V Voltage ............................................. 220 V
Frequenza .................................. 50 Hz Frequency ....................................... 50Hz
Potenza ....................................... 0,175 kW Power ................................................ 0,175 kW
Assorbimento nominale.... 1,3 A Nominal electrical absorption..... 1,3 A

ID no. 84024
ID no. 84024
ID no. 84025
Compressore
CF040012
Compressor
807CGH60 ASF THOMAS - PUMPS & COMPRESSOR
Portata ........................................ 77 l/min Flow rate ......................................... 77 l/min

Pressione max......................... 7 bar Max pressure ................................. 7 bar
Protezione.................................. IP20 Protection ........................................ IP20
Tensione ..................................... 220 V Voltage ............................................. 220 V
Frequenza .................................. 50 Hz Frequency ....................................... 50 Hz
Potenza ....................................... 0,58 kW Power ................................................ 0,58 kW
Assorbimento nominale.... 3A Nominal electrical absorption..... 3 A

ID no. 84025
ID no. 84025
ID no. 84025
ID no. 84026
Elettrovalvola 2/2 CJ000098

Solenoid valve 2/2 CJ000100
150/R-5630SM5 L.G.M. Engineering S.r.l.
Fluido ....................................................... vapore Fluid .................................................. steam

Tipo ........................................................... NC Type ................................................. NC
Azionamento ........................................ diretto Acting ............................................... direct
Attacchi ................................................... gas Pipes ................................................ gas
Orifizio ...................................................... 2,8 mm Orifice................................................ 2,8 mm
Pressione di esercizio ...................... 0-6 barg Operating pressure ...................... 0-6 barg
Temperatura di esercizio ............... 0+180C Operating temperature ............... 0+180C
Alimentazione ....................................... 24 Vdc Voltage ............................................. 24 Vdc
Protezione............................................... IP65 Insulation ......................................... IP65
Bobina tipo ............................................. SM5 Coil type ........................................... SM5
Bobina classe ....................................... H Wire class ........................................ H
Materiali / Materials
Codice Corpo Canotto Orifizio Tenuta

Code Body Plunger Orifice Seal
Ottone stampato
CJ000098
Moulded brass Acciaio inox Acciaio inox Viton
AISI 316 Stainless steel Stainless steel Viton
CJ000100
AISI 316
ID no. 84027
Elettrovalvola 2/2
CJ000099
Solenoid valve 2/2
D106BE64/521 L.G.M. Engineering S.r.l.
Fluido ....................................................... vapore Fluid .................................................. steam

Tipo ........................................................... NC Type ................................................. NC
Azionamento ........................................ diretto Acting ............................................... direct
Attacchi ................................................... gas Pipes ................................................ gas
Orifizio ...................................................... 6,4 mm Orifice................................................ 6,4 mm
Pressione di esercizio ...................... 0-5 barg Operating pressure ...................... 0-5 barg
Temperatura di esercizio ............... -10+140C Operating temperature ............... -10..+140C
Alimentazione ....................................... 24 Vdc Voltage ............................................. 24 Vdc
Protezione............................................... IP65 Insulation ......................................... IP65
Bobina tipo ............................................. 521 Coil type ........................................... 521
Bobina classe ....................................... H Wire class ........................................ H
Materiali Materials
Corpo .................................... ottone Body ................................... brass

Canotto ................................ AISI 316 L Plunger .............................. stainless steel
Orifizio ................................... acciaio inox Orifice.................................. stainless steel
Tenuta ................................... EPDM Seal...................................... EPDM

ID no. 84028
Cartuccia filtri
CC120130
Filters cartridge
MCY1110PFRPH4 PALL Process Filtration Limited
Tipo ........................................ Junior Style Type ................................... Junior Style

Configurazione .................. innesto con 4 alette Configuration ................... single open ended
with 4 locking tabs
Temperatura Max operating
operativa max .................... 90C temperature ....................... 90C
Materiale setto .................. doppio strato PTFE Membrane ......................... double layer PTFE
Superficie filtrante ........... 0.045 m2 Filtering area .................... 0.045 m2
Materiale strati di Support and drainage
supporto ............................... Polipropilene layers ................................... Polypropylene
Materiale gabbia Cage, end cap
esterna................................... Polipropilene and core .............................. Polypropylene
Tipo o-ring ........................... Silicone O-ring type ........................ Silicone
Potere di ritenzione Absolute removal
assoluto ................................ 0.003 m in gas rating .................................... 0.003 m in gases
Massima Pressione Differenziale

Maximum Differential Pressure
Temperatura Flusso
Temperature Forward
50C 5.5 bar
90C 3.5 bar
32
ID no. 84029
Interruttore di livello a galleggiante verticale

CD340115
Vertical level switch with float
211-985 RS Components Ltd.
Temperature di Temperature
funzionamento ................. 0C75C range ................................. 0C75C
Tensione max. ................... 50 V Max voltage ...................... 50 V
Corrente max. .................... 0,5 A Max current ....................... 0,5 A
Potenza max. ......................10 W/VA Max power......................... 10 W/VA
Durata elettrica ..................5x106 operazioni Electrical life ..................... 5x106 operations
Lunghezza cavo ................1,5 m Cable length ..................... 1,5 m
Materiali Materials
Flottante................................ polipropilene Float ................................... polypropylene

Asta ........................................ PPS Bar ...................................... PPS
Corpo/prolunga ................. PVC classe 7 Body/pipe........................... PVC class 7

ID no. 84030
Miniradiatore completo di ventilatore assiale compatto

CJ090081
Air cooler condenser supplied with compact axial fan

STFT82110 (Miniradiatore/ Air cooler
condenser) LU-VE
A12A23HTS (Ventilatore assiale/ Axial fun)
Portata ................................... 115 m3/h Flow rate ........................... 115 m3/h

Alimentazione .................... 230 V AC Voltage ............................... 230 V AC
(cod. 6125.0004) (cod. 6125.0004)
Frequenza ............................ 50/60 Hz Frequency ......................... 50/60 Hz
Potenza assorbita ............ 16/14 W Power .................................. 16/14 W
Il ventilatore adatto a lavorare in continuo The fan is able to work continuously 24h/24h
24h/24h

ID no. 84031
Pompa a membrana
CF030191
Vertical centrifugal pump
H30P3P Electro AD MARAZ
Potenza ....................................... 50 W Power ................................. 50 W

Alimentazione ......................... 230 V monofase Voltage .............................. 230 V one-phase
Frequenza .................................. 50/60 Hz Frequency ......................... 50/60 Hz
Assorbimento .......................... 0.6 A Electrical input ................. 0.6 A
Temperatura flusso max. Max flow temperature
in condizione di vapore for saturated steam ........ 135C
saturo ........................................... 135C in
Protezione.................................. IP54 Protection .......................... IP54
Materiale membrana ............. EPDM Diaphragm material ....... EPDM
........................................
DIMENSIONI / DIMENSIONS
Gruppo di
connessione
Connections
Membrana
Diaphragm
ID no. 84032
Interruttore di prossimit induttivo

CD200053
Inductive proximity sensor
XS1-M08PB370 TELEMECANIQUE
Tipo ........................................ 3 fili PNP, NC Type ........................................ 3 wires PNP, NC

Tensione nominale ......... 1248 V Nominal voltage ................... 1248 V
Limiti di tensione ............ 1058 V Voltage limits ......................... 1058 V
Corrente commutata....... 0200 mA Load switching capacity .... 0200 mA
Campo di Operating
funzionamento................... 01.2 mm zone .......................................... 01.2 mm
Temperatura di Operating temperature
funzionamento................... -25+80C range ......................................... -25+80C
Collegamento ..................... cavo Connection ............................. cable
Sezione cavo ...................... 3x0.11 mm2 Cable section ........................ 3x0.11 mm2
Lunghezza cavo ................ 2 m Cable length .......................... 2 m
Protezione............................ IP67 Protection ............................... IP67
a = 50
b = 40
c=8
ID no. 84033
Regolatore di flusso
CB100022
Flow regulator
MV120018 C.MATIC
Attacco .................................. 1/8 Connection ....................... 1/8

Tolleranza sui tubi ........... +0,05 mm Hose tolerance ............... +0,05 mm
Temperatura di lavoro ... 0C70C Working temperature ... 0C70C
Pressione max ................... 10 bar Max pressure .................. 10 bar
Campi di applicazione ... circuiti pneumatici Application field .............. pneumatic circuits
Materiale ............................... ottone nichelato Material............................... nickel-plated brass
D1 L1 L2max S1 S2
1/8 6 32 14 10
ID no. 84035
Valvola di ritegno
CJ080039
Check Valve
S22 ULKA
Attacco .................................. 1/8 G Connection ...................................... 1/8 G

Autoinnesco in contropressione Self-priming in counter pressure conditions
Installazione sul lato mandata della pompa a Installation on delivery head of vibration pump
vibrazione prodotta da ULKA mod. EX5 manufactured by ULKA mod. EX5

ID no. 84036
Rubinetto con galleggiante

CB100021
Taps with float
00010000 M.T.M. HYDRO s.r.l.
Attacco .................................. 3/4 M Connection ....................... 3/4 M

Pressione max................... 10 bar (145psi) Max pressure .................. 10 bar (145 psi)
Temperatura max. ............ 60C (140F) Max temperature............. 60C (140F)
Ingombro .............................. 200 mm (78 inch) Overall size ....................... 200 mm (78 inch)
Materiale ............................... plastica Material............................... plastic
ID no. 84038
Scambiatore di calore
GL400649
Heat exchanger
----- FEDEGARI
Diametro ............................................... 88.9 mm Diameter ...................................... 88.9 mm

Lunghezza ........................................... 258 mm Length ........................................... 258 mm
Volume utile ....................................... 1.6 lt Operating volume ...................... 1.6 lt
No. spire utili serpentina Number of coil active loop
acqua di scarico ............................. 16 for water discharging ................ 16
Superficie interna serpentina Coil internal area
acqua di scarico ............................. 56520 mm2 for water discharging ................ 56520 mm2
Volume interno serpentina Coil internal volume
acqua di scarico ............................. 0,085 lt for water discharging ................ 0,085 lt
No. spire utili serpentina Number of coil active
aria compressa.................................. 16 loop for compressed air ........... 16
aria compressa..................................25120 mm2 for compressed air ..................... 25120 mm2
aria compressa.................................. 0,025 lt for compressed air ..................... 0,025 lt
Temperatura aria Inlet compressed
compressa in ingresso ................. 20C air temperature............................ 20C
Temperatura acqua Outlet water to steam
in uscita al generatore ................... 90C generator temperature ............. 90C
Materiale ..................................................... AISI 316L Material .................................................. AISI 316L
ID no. 84040
Trasduttore di pressione
CD230037
Pressure transducer
404366/024/998/405/502/020/061 JUMO
Campo di misura .......................... 0-5 bar abs Pressure range .......................... 0-5 bar abs
Segnale uscita ............................... 4-20 mA, 2 fili Output ........................................... 4-20 mA, 2wire
Tensione ........................................... 12-30 Vdc Voltage .......................................... 12-30 Vdc
Connettore....................................... DIN 43650 Connector ..................................... DIN 43650
Attacco .............................................. gas maschio Connection ................................... gas male
Protezione........................................ IP65 Protection ..................................... IP65
Protezione EMC ............................ EN50081-1 EMC protection........................... EN50081-1
EN50081-2 EN50081-2
EN50082-2 EN50082-2
Errore ................................................. < 0.5% FS Error................................................ < 0.5% FS
Isteresi ............................................... < 0.1% FS Hysteresis..................................... < 0.1% FS
Coefficiente T dello zero........... < 0.1% FS/10K Ambient T error to zero ........... < 0.1%
Coefficiente T dello span ......... < 0.1% FS/10K FS/10K
Temperatura di lavoro ............... - 20+120C Ambient T error to span .......... < 0.1%
Temperatura del fluido .............. - 20+120C FS/10K
Temperatura di calibrazione ... 25C Working temperature................ - 20+120C
Fluid temperature ...................... - 20+120C
Calibration temperature........... 25C

ID no. 84043
Sensore di livello magnetico

CD050012
Magnetic level sensor
ILMU.5 (cod. 14512210) SAIET Elettronica
Galleggiante........................pieno Float ................................... full

Diametro galleggiante....31 mm Float diameter .................. 31 mm
Peso ........................................25 gr Weight................................. 25 gr
Peso specifico Min liquid
minimo del liquido ...........0,7 kg/dm3 specific gravity ................. 0,7 kg/dm3
Pressione max...................2 kg/cm2 Max pressure ................... 2 kg/cm2
Fissaggio.............................. G Connection ........................ G
Montaggio ............................orizzontale Mounting ............................ horizontal
Uscita .....................................NA, NC Output ................................. NA, NC
Temperatura di Operating
funzionamento...................-20C+80C temperature ....................... -20C+80C
Grado di protezione ........IP67 Protection degree ........... IP67
Collegamento .....................cavo Output connection .......... cable
Lunghezza cavo ................0,3 m Cable length ..................... 0,3 m
Contatti..................................5 Contacts ............................. 5
Tensione di Max switching
commutazione max.........240 V AC voltage ................................. 240 V AC
Corrente di Max switching
commutazione max.........0,5 A current ................................. 0,5 A
Potenza di Max switching
commutazione max.........50 VA power ................................... 50 VA
Materiali Materials
Contenitore ......................... plastica Case ................................... plastic

Cavo ...................................... PVC, AWG 22 Cable .................................. PVC, AWG 22

ID no. 84044
Pompa
CF030176
Pump
EX5 ULKA
Temperatura fluido ................... 25C Fluid temperature .......... 25C

Alimentazione ............................. 220V Voltage ............................... 220V
Frequenza ..................................... 50 Hz Frequency ......................... 50 Hz
Potenza .......................................... 48 W Power .................................. 48 W
Portata ............................................ 0,4 l/min Flow rate ............................ 0,4 l/min
Classe ............................................. F Class ................................... F

ID no. 84046
Serbatoio
CK070015
Tank
PL 416 LAMA PLAST
Capacit ................................15 litri Capacity ............................ 15 litres

Diametro ............................... 240 mm Diameter ............................ 240 mm
Altezza ................................... 460 mm Height.................................. 460 mm
Diametro bocca ................. 115 mm Cap diameter.................... 115 mm
Materiali Materials
Polietilene alta densit Polyethylene high density
ID no. 84053
Resistenze elettriche
GM550096
Heating elements

Esecuzione secondo disegno FEDEGARI
IRCA
Execution according to FEDEGARI drawing
Potenza ................................. 7000 W Power ................................. 7000 W

Potenza specifica ............. 5.4 W/cm2 Specific power ................. 5.4 W/cm2
Tensione ............................... 230 V Voltage ............................... 460 mm
Lunghezza cavi ................. 2000 mm Cables lenght ................... 2000 mm
Materiali Materials
Resistenza elettrica ........ Incoloy 800 Heating elements............ Incoloy 800

Flangia ................................... AISI 316 L Flange ................................. AISI 316 L

ID no. 84502
Valvola di ritegno
CJ080042
Non-return valve
MV 33 04 M5 C.MATIC
Pressione di lavoro .............. 2 10 bar Working pressure .......... 2 10 bar

Pressione di apertura ......... 0.2 bar Opening pressure .......... 0.2 bar
Temperatura di lavoro ........ -10 70 C Working temperature ... -10 70 C

ID no. 86354
Motore con motoriduttore

CF020026
Motor equipped with motor reducer
AMF1 25/2 R.1/4.8 PIEMME s.r.l.
Tensione ............................... 230/400 V Voltage .............................. 230/400 V

Frequenza ............................ 50 Hz Frequency ......................... 50 Hz
Potenza ................................. 0.18 kW Power .................................. 0.18 kW
Numero poli ........................ 4 Poles ................................... 4
Velocit ................................ 292 rpm Speed ................................ 292 rpm
Rapporto di riduzione .... 1 / 4.8 Reduction ratio ............... 1 / 4.8
Coppia resa ..................... 5.6 Nm Torque ................................ 5.6 Nm
Albero in uscita ................. 14 mm Shaft ................................... 14 mm
Protezione............................ IP55 Protection .......................... IP55
Classe di isolamento ...... F Isolating class .................. F
........................................
d L T F G R S U cMF
14 25 55 105 70 85 7 3 116
ID no. 86355
Scambiatore di calore
GL400658
Heat exchanger
----- FEDEGARI
Diametro ........................................... 88.9 mm Diameter ...................................... 88.9 mm

Lunghezza ....................................... 198 mm Length ........................................... 198 mm
Volume utile ................................... 1.3 lt Operating volume ...................... 1.3 lt
No. spire utili serpentina Number of coil active loop
acqua di scarico ......................... 11 for water discharging ................ 11
acqua di scarico ......................... 33814 mm2 for water discharging ................ 33814 mm2
acqua di scarico ......................... 0.051 lt for water discharging ................ 0.051 mm2
No. spire utili serpentina Number of coil active
aria compressa.............................. 11 loop for compressed air ........... 11
aria compressa.............................. 16462 mm2 for compressed air ..................... 16462 mm2
aria compressa.............................. 0.016 lt for compressed air ..................... 0.016 lt
Temperatura aria Inlet compressed
compressa in ingresso ............. 20C air temperature ............................ 20C
Temperatura acqua Outlet water to steam
in uscita al generatore ............... 90C generator temperature ............. 90C
Materiale ................................................. AISI 316L Material .................................................. AISI 316L
ID no. 86618
Trasmettitore di livello con controllo di capacit e conducibilit CD050024

Level transmitter for checking of capacity and conductibility CD050025
ET-CL/SRC1/FDG EUROTEK s.r.l.
Codice.................................... 15218 Code ................................... 15218

Segnale in uscita .............. ON/OFF Output signal ................... ON/OFF
Alimentazione .................... 7.5 mA Electric input .................... 7.5 mA
Corrente massima Max output
di uscita ................................ 18.5 mA current ................................ 18.5 mA
Tensione ............................... 12.0 V Voltage .............................. 12.0 V
Collegamento ..................... cavo a tre conduttori Connection ........................ cable with three
wires
Trasmettitore di livello Lunghezza cavo

Level transmitter Cable length
CD050024 2,0 m
CD050025 5,0 m
Materiali Materials
Corpo sonda ....................... acciaio INOX Probe body........................ INOX

Cavo ...................................... silicone Cable .................................. silicon

Fedegari Autoclaaf Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fedegari Autoclaaf Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERIES

SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 2

SECTION 4 - PROCESS CONTROLLER 4

SECTION 6 - COMPONENT DATA SHEETS 6

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 1 / 22 February 2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SECTION 1

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE...........................................................4

1.2. FAMILY IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 4

1.3. MACHINE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 4

1.4. KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE ........................................................................................... 5

1.5. MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL) ............................................ 8

1.6. CONTROL AND MONITORING COMPONENTS.............................................................................. 12

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 2 / 22 February 2006

1.7. SAFETY SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 17

1.8. TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................................................ 19

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 3 / 22 February 2006

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE

1.2. FAMILY IDENTIFICATION

FVG3 140 liters

1.3. MACHINE IDENTIFICATION

Figure 1.3 CE identification plate

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 4 / 22 February 2006

1.4. KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE

Figure 1.4 - Sterilizer

1.4.1. STERILIZATION CHAMBER

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 5 / 22 February 2006

1.4.2. LID AND SEALING SYSTEM

Figure 1.4.2.b Safety lever mechanism of lid

1.4.3. TECHNICAL AREA CABINET

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 6 / 22 February 2006

1.4.4. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1.4.5. ELECTRICAL PANEL

1.4.6. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM

1.4.7. PROCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL

1.4.8. ELECTRIC COMPRESSOR FOR PRESSURIZING THE GASKET

1.4.9. STEAM GENERATOR

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 7 / 22 February 2006

- Manual discharge valve;

1.4.10. CONDENSATE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM

1.4.11. PRODUCT LOADING/UNLOADING DEVICES

Figure 1.4.11.a- Loading/unloading operation Figure 1.4.11.b- Loading/unloading devices

1.5. MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL)

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 8 / 22 February 2006

Kit identifier Kit name

1.5.1. ENHANCED INTERNAL ELECTRIC AIR COMPRESSOR (KG41)

1.5.2. CONDENSATE COOLING UNIT (KG50)

1.5.3. CONDENSATE RECOVERY TRAY (KG64)

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 9 / 22 February 2006

1.5.4. PRE-VACUUM DEVICE (KG65)

1.5.5. TANK FOR SUPPLYING WATER TO THE STEAM GENERATOR (KG66)

The tank must contain at least 10 liters of

1.5.6. PROCESS PRINTER (KG81)

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 10 / 22 February 2006

When lit continuously, indicates an error

Print button Not enabled.

Feed button When pressed, causes the paper to advance.

Fig. 1.5.5 Thermal printer

1.5.7. LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83)

Improper use of the load lifting device

Fig. 1.5.6.a Lifting device

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3 11 / 22 February 2006

Fig. 1.5.6.b Fastening accessory

1.5.8. PORT ADAPTER FOR VALIDATION SENSOR (KG90)